AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

" TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. find a keyword on the Index tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . You can also press SHIFT+F1. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips.In the bottom left corner of the window. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. click Autodesk Revit Help. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. In the Status Bar. There are several tools that help you find information. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Click the Help button. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. You can use this tri-pane. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. 20 Press TAB. Windows: From any window. The Status Bar also provides information. click Modify. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. regarding selected components within a view. in conjunction with Tooltips. In this case. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. click . If there is no Help button displayed. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. When you place the cursor over a component. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next.

before proceeding further. stairs. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. For learning purposes. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. doors. common terms. review the tutorial. Understanding the Concepts. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. Therefore. and then add the passageway between them. If you have not already done so. floors. You should understand the user interface. you create the shell of the west wing . For training purposes.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building.including all windows. 11 . and a roof . As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. While creating your first building information model. this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods.mirror it to create the east wing. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway. all views and schedules instantly update.

you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. In this exercise. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. After adding dimensions. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. click Open. When you create walls. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. and a roof. you add and modify doors and windows. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. at a later time. you create. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. expand Views (all). Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. you can. and double-click North. expand Elevations. click Level. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. stairs. ceilings. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. Open m_First_Project. you use the west wing to create the east wing. and apply new wall types. Using the mirror tool. and then add the passageway between them. modify. After sketching the walls. click the Training Files icon. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. You then add sketched components such as floors.rvt located in the Metric folder. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. As you design the walls. Finally.

it toggles to 2D. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. When you click Modify. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. the datum is in model extent mode. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. 8 Select Level 4. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. If you click the 3D control. ■ Select . In the Project Browser. Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. With the 3D designation. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. In this view. 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. this indicates that you can select and edit the values.3 On the Options Bar. click Modify. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. When you select Level 4. This means that if you move the extents of one level line. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. it terminates the command in progress.

which define the East. double-click Level 1. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. tool on the toolbar. 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. and South elevation views. there are four elevation symbols. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. North. Theoretically. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. In such a case. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. West. However. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. In the steps that follow. In this view. mirroring it to create the east wing. use the wheel on your mouse. a west wing. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof.

and South elevation views are inactive. West. This means that each view is infinite. North. select Basic Wall: Exterior . do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. 18 In the Type Selector. click Wall. 16 In the drawing area.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. Later in this tutorial. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. Do not click the symbol. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view.Brick on CMU. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. For training purposes. you use this command to modify the view. A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . click the Elevation: West symbol.

you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. vertical wall of the rectangle. you can flip the wall orientation. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. TIP If necessary.19 In the Options Bar. 24 On the View toolbar. Select the drawing tool. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. 22 Select the left. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu.000 mm long. and click to complete the rectangle. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.000 mm wide and 24. By clicking the arrows. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. This is a temporary dimension. Also notice the dimension that displays. . You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. click Modify. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. click . 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . as shown. The selected wall is red. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12.

Creating Your First Building Model | 17 . 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. TIP When entering a value. For example. 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. you do not need to type the metric suffix. In addition. You do not need to enter 12000 mm. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall.

33 On the View Control Bar. The brick surface pattern displays. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice the material settings. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. enter ZF. including the brick surface pattern displays. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Modify. and click Hidden Line. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. 32 On the keyboard. and click Shading with Edges. 29 Draw a region around the corner. click Zoom in Region. as shown. click the Model Graphics Style control. 30 On the Design Bar. it is displayed as solid fill. Notice the wall remains selected.

Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. In the steps that follow. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . and then apply it to the remaining walls. For example. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. it has no effect on components that are not selected. only the wall that you selected would change. If you change an instance parameter. 35 On the Options Bar. To accomplish this. you create a new wall type. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. modify it. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. In the upper half of the dialog box. which control all components of the same type. you can see the list of type parameters. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. which control the selected component or components. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. However. For example. You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. click . you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type.

click Preview.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under the Value column for Structure. enter the new wall name. enter 13500 for Sample Height.36 In the Element Properties dialog box. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. Therefore. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 38 In the Name dialog box. For training purposes. click Edit. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. You can specify the sample height to any value you want. the original wall type must remain unchanged. Exterior . and click OK. click Edit/New.

the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area.0 mm for Offset. click Sweeps. select layer 9. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. In the Materials dialog box.Brick Soldier Course. Enter -50. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. click Add. Verify that Base is selected for From. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . select Section: Modify type attributes. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. 42 Under the preview pane. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. This should be the interior finish layer. Click inside the Material field. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. for View. 49 Under Layers. under Name. select Masonry . 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. Make sure the offset is a negative number. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course.Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. and click OK. When you select a layer.

Verify that the Offset is zero. click Add. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Verify that Base is selected for From. click Reveals. Select Flip. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Enter -50 mm for Offset. 57 Click Apply. Verify that Base is selected for From. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Select Masonry . click Add. and click OK. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Make sure it is a negative number.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 52 For the second wall sweep. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. under Modify Vertical Structure. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Enter 8000 mm for Distance.Brick Soldier Course for Material. click Sweeps. 58 Click Add. 53 Click OK.

Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 64 On the Design Bar. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. Select Flip. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 66 On the View toolbar. click . click OK. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. click OK.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. click Modify. Verify that the Offset is zero. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . Verify that Base is selected for From. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. 60 Click OK. 65 On the View menu.

Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. 67 On the View Control Bar. 72 On the Design Bar. you add the interior walls of the west wing. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Modify.rvt. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. and click Save. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 69 On the View toolbar. 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type.Brick on CMU. They do not have sweeps or reveals. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. click the Model Graphics Style control. TIP To select multiple components. and click Shading with Edges. Exterior . Also notice the button remains activated. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save As. Notice that. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. When finished. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing. after the new wall type is applied. 68 Enter ZF. click . the interior walls resemble the following illustration. 71 In the Type Selector. 73 On the File menu. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. This turns off thin lines globally.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view.

specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 .135mm Partition (2-hr). under Floor Plans. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 3 In the Type Selector. Select the Line sketching tool. double-click Level 1. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down. select Basic Wall: Interior . . m_First_Project-in_progress. place the cursor over the north wall.rvt. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and click. click Wall. 4 In the Options Bar.

8 Move the cursor down. and select the second interior wall. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. Click to specify the wall start point. press and hold CTRL. If you zoom into the model. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls. the snap values decrease. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. click Modify.

TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Settings menu. click a temporary dimension value. click Modify. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. select Basic Wall: Interior . The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected.79mm Partition (1-hr). as shown. 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. 11 On the Options Bar. click the Graphics tab. they display as red. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. 15 In the Type Selector. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time.After the walls are selected. select Options. click Activate Dimensions. and enter 4750 mm. click Wall. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide. specify the selection color. and under Colors.

18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes. Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. If necessary.17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement. as shown. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

In the above illustration and callout. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. 24 Click to split the wall.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Enter ZR. NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. click Modify. you can click on the View toolbar. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. 23 In the drawing area. After splitting the wall. click Modify. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. This places the view in thin lines mode. 22 On the Tools toolbar. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. When you are finished splitting the walls. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. and you can now split walls and lines. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. As you move the cursor over the wall. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick.

26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. 27 On the Standard toolbar. 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit. and delete the segment. 30 Enter ZF. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. click Modify. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click . split the right corridor wall.

After the second split. 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. click . 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. click .There are two remaining splits to make. 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . 31 On the Tools toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment. 35 On the View toolbar. click 36 On the View toolbar. Zoom in as necessary. . 32 On the Options Bar. Notice the interior walls that you added and split. the inner segment is deleted automatically. This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction.

the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. you add dimension lines to the building model. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Level 1 . You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. ■ ■ For Prefer. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. 6 In the Type Selector. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints. The floor plan. and click OK. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar.38 On the File menu. click Save. and click Duplicate.Dimensioned and Annotated. right-click Level 1. and components that require dimensioning.Dimensioned and Annotated. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines. click Rename. under Views (all). specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . it opens automatically in the Project Browser. Dimensioning the Building Model. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. should be open. select Wall centerlines. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. In that case.5mm Arial. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. options. click Dimension. This is the aligned dimension option. and in the context menu.rvt. enter Level 1 . 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Next. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. ready for modification. For Pick. select Individual References. under Floor Plans. In the final section of this exercise.2. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. When geometry is selected for modification. right-click Copy of Level 1. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. When you duplicate a view. m_First_Project-in_progress. 5 On the Options Bar.

click to select it. click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 . When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline.7 In the drawing area. 10 On the Design Bar. Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. click to select it. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline.

Controls display on the value. Information is displayed in a tooltip. This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. on each witness line. or in the status bar of the drawing window. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. Notice the dimension value turns blue. In its current state. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and press ENTER. the dimension value displays as modifiable. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. change it to 4750. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. indicating that the control moves the witness line. and a blue padlock displays. the value is not available for modification. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. change it to 15000. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. and press ENTER. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. 12 Select the dimension line. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left.

select Intersecting Walls. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . and click OK. click Modify. Click Options. select Wall centerlines. zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 23 Select the left. vertical. click Dimension. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. For Pick. select Entire Walls. exterior wall. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. and click to place the dimension as shown. move the cursor to the left.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box.

Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top. and click Delete Witness Line. NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line. 26 Using the following illustration as a guide. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

click Edit Witness Lines.27 Right-click the dimension line. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line. and in the context menu. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 . it provides a different set of options on the context menu.

38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor. NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. or press ESC on the keyboard.29 After selecting the wall. click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process.

31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm.Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 39 .

The relationship between these components is constrained. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall.32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. if you move one component. 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. This dimension does not need to be precise. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. Notice a lock displays for each segment.

38 On the Options Bar. select Value for Equality Display. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . click . Next. under Other. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. Adding Doors and Windows. under Floor Plans. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. 40 In the Project Browser. select Save. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). You begin by adding single flush doors. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. you add doors and windows to the building model. you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. In the final section of the exercise. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. 41 On the File menu. and click OK.

the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Do not click at this time. This is the mechanical room. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. the door resides on a level line. 3 In the north side of the building model. Regardless of the initial placement.rvt. click Door. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. When you add a door. m_First_Project-in_progress. 2 In the Type Selector. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. You can offset the door from the level. however. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. In addition. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. doors snap automatically to the closest available level.

specify a value of 600 mm. Notice the blue controls that display. You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening. Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . When you are finished. After you add door number 2. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. and press ENTER. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). Press the Spacebar a second time. Do not be concerned with exact placement. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. The precise dimensions are not important. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room.

ZF.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and select M_Double-Glass 2.rfa. click Door. click Training Files. Flip the door. and select M_Double-Flush. 17 Press and hold CTRL.rfa. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. as shown. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Load. to zoom to fit. click Modify. and set the temporary dimensions. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box.rfa extension. 14 On the Options Bar. All Revit Building families have an .

20 In the Type Selector. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor.You can load multiple families at the same time. as shown.rfa. When more than one family is selected. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. a preview image does not display. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm. The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. 18 Press and hold CTRL. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . 22 In the Type Selector. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. Each door should open into the room.

23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. 26 In the Type Selector. The arrow has been added for training purposes. This is door number 13 in the following illustration. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. This is door number 14 in the following illustration. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1.

32 Expand the Walls category. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. If your view displays solid fill. under Elevations. and scroll down to Walls. 30 On the View menu. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. zoom in until the brick pattern displays. Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. under Views (all). NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. and clear Surface Pattern. double-click North. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . 31 Click the Model Categories tab. select Visibility/Graphics.

Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. In this case. 35 In the Type Selector. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. then Level 2. as shown. double-click Level 1. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. and down to Level 1. You can apply an offset if required. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. When adding a door. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. click Door. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.33 Click OK. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. Notice the door snaps to each level. under Floor Plans. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view.

40 On the Options Bar. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. TIP For each component type. as shown. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. This should be door number 15. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. 44 In the Type Selector. click the double doors to add a tag. 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. click Tag. clear Leader. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. click Door. 41 On the upper exterior wall. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view.

click . select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. Like doors. 49 Spin the model. 50 On the File menu. just like doors. As you move the cursor over a wall. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 54 In the Type Selector. and notice the doors you added. you can flip the window after placement. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. 47 On the View toolbar. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. click 48 On the View toolbar. . click Modify. double-click Level 1.46 On the Design Bar. click Save. under Floor Plans. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser. Windows are wall-hosted components. the window displays at the cursor. click Window. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. modify it. materials. click . you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. and 3D views. 61 On the Options Bar. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. 59 Zoom around the window. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 58 On the View toolbar. In this project. go to Help. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. click Window. click Modify. 57 On the Design Bar. elevation. click Cancel. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. and visibility. and select it. and reload it into the project. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification.You can add windows in plan. click . If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. IMPORTANT  If necessary. as shown. click to place it as shown. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. In the family editor. When you add a window in a plan view. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags.

A tooltip is displayed. and make sure Copy is selected. click Modify. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. When you mirror a component or components. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. and click to set the mirror axis. 74 Move the cursor to the left.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the three remaining windows. The copy option is selected by default. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. click to select it. 71 On the Options Bar. click . click Mirror. 70 On the Edit menu. press and hold CTRL. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can pick or draw the mirror axis. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. In this case.

77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 . Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 76 On the Design Bar. You tag the windows later in the exercise. at the dimensions shown.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged. click Window.

82 On the Options Bar. select 2nd. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. and click to set the array end point. Select Constrain. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall. click Modify. 81 On the Edit menu. For Move To. Enter 5 for Number. Creating an array is a three-step process. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click to set the array start point. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. Clear Group And Associate. click Array. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array.78 On the Design Bar. You then move the array to the second or last location. You first click a point to specify the array start point. you can use the array tool to finish the job. it is an ideal situation to use an array.

Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. click Window. undo the step and try again. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. 86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. as shown. If you make a mistake placing the array. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged.

92 In the 3D Drawing area. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. . you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. and notice the windows you added. on the View toolbar. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. drag a selection box around the entire building model. click 89 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click . 90 Spin the model.

press and hold CTRL. under Elevations. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . double-click North. 95 On the Edit menu. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. click Window.This selects every component in the building model. 93 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. clear walls and doors from the selection. double-click South. select Level 3. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. 94 In the Filter dialog box. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. click Window. notice the wall surface pattern displays. 103 In the Project Browser. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. 99 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. 96 On the Edit menu. click Modify. click . select Level 2. 101 On the Options Bar. 104 On the Design Bar. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Copy to Clipboard. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. In this view. 98 On the Design Bar. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. clear Tag on Placement. such as equality constraints. and click OK. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier.

rvt. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. Floors. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. m_First_Project-in_progress. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. or ceiling. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. Like walls. 110 On the File menu. You can also select or draw lines. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. When sketching these components. select Window Tags. and all require their borders to be sketched. click Tag All Not Tagged. In this exercise. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. double-click Level 1.106 In the Project Browser. you can select walls to define the border of the component. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. under Floor Plans. . Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click . roofs. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. roof. each of these components can have a compound structure. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. click Save. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. When walls intersect a floor. click 2 On the View toolbar. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. 6 On the Design Bar. 14 On the View toolbar. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. A magenta line displays with flip arrows. The Design Bar now has only one tab. click the flip arrows to flip the line. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. verify that Pick Walls is selected. click Floor Properties. Sketch. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 .4 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When in sketch mode.300mm for Type. In addition. clear Extend into wall (to core). click Floor. click Finish Sketch. click . under Floor Plans. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. You are in sketch mode. double-click Level 1. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Click the upper exterior wall. 12 Select Concrete .

18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. double-click Level 2. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. Notice the location of the magenta line. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this view. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. press TAB. When the chain of walls highlights. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . when it highlights under the cursor. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Floor. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. 17 On the Options Bar. click to select it.

32 In the Type Selector. After you add these components. 27 On the View toolbar. move the elevator into position. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . click 28 On the View toolbar. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. click Component. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. and click to place it. . A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. These elevators are wall-hosted components. and click OK. Next. as shown. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. under Floor Plans. click Floor Properties.20 Click the flip arrows. the walls remain attached. double-click Level 1. 24 Click Finish Sketch. 22 On the Design Bar. click . 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. To do this. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. position the cursor on the wall.

and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. 36 On the Design Bar.TIP After adding the elevators. 37 In the Type Selector. click Modify. as shown. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. click Component. select each one. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. click Rotate. For example. when you sketch a wall. establish the direction of the rotation. Rotating an object requires two clicks. click Modify. When rotating. The component will rotate to the value.39 On the Design Bar. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. The first click specifies the rotation start point. 40 Select the sink. when rotating the component. In this case. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. the second click specifies the rotation end point. 41 On the Edit menu. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown.

48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. click Component. as shown.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 47 Add the toilet on the right wall. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 46 In the Type Selector.

(Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name.) This captures all the internal walls. click Copy to Clipboard. right-click. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. and components. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. the interior walls. clear Door Tags. 54 On the Edit menu. click . doors. click Modify. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . 55 On the Edit menu. elevators. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Before adding the final floor. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. doors. 56 Select Level 2. and click Zoom To Fit. 53 In the Filter dialog box. 52 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click OK. In addition.

You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. For more information regarding the warning. . 58 If you received the conflict message. 57 In the Project Browser. it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3. you are prompted to select the floor. 61 On the View toolbar. click . it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. or ceiling in which you want the opening. zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. If you know the source of the problem. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. double-click Level 2. if necessary. Therefore. under Floor Plans. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . In the steps that follow. If you received this error. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. When you add a model opening.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. roof. click 62 On the View toolbar.

double-click Level 1. 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. click Section. as shown. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. Adding a section is a two-click process. and click Zoom To Fit. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. 70 Using the shape handles. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . and the second click specifies the section tail. 68 Click the section line. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. click to set the start point.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. After you add the section. under Floor Plans. The first click specifies the section head.

just as the level heads do in an elevation view. and click OK. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. click Modify. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. the referenced view opens. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Similarly. select it. 72 Double-click the section head.71 On the Design Bar. click Opening. The section head is displayed in blue. select Pick a roof. floor. when it highlights. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. or ceiling and cut vertically.

click Lines.Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. 76 In the Go to View dialog box. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. When locked. select the rectangle drawing tool. 79 On the Options Bar. In the following illustration. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. Notice the locking constraints that display. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. and click Open View. select Floor Plan: Level 2. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 . the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. 78 On the Design Bar.

NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. select it. 89 On the Design Bar. 90 On the Options Bar. click Lines. double-click Section 1. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. select Pick a roof. click Opening. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. select the rectangle drawing tool. 82 On the Design Bar. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. click Finish Sketch. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 83 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Section). floor. and click OK. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. and click Open View. 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. or ceiling and cut vertically. 92 Click Finish Sketch. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs.

103 On the View toolbar. when it highlights. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. or ceiling and cut vertically. select Pick a roof. You have completed the three openings required for this level. double-click Section 1. under Sections (Building Section). 98 Zoom in to the elevators. 94 On the Design Bar. click . . click Lines. and click OK. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. floor. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. 99 On the Design Bar. click 104 On the View toolbar. 102 Click Finish Sketch. click Opening. select Floor Plan: Level 2. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 .Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. 100 On the Options Bar. select it. select the rectangle drawing tool. After adding a floor to Level 3. you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. and click Open View.

when the wall highlights under the cursor. under Floor Plans.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. click Floor. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 119 On the Edit menu. 109 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 3. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. and. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. Make sure you do not select Floors. 118 On the Edit menu. 116 On the Options Bar. clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). double-click Section 1. under Views (all). and click Zoom To Fit. when the chain of walls highlights. press TAB. 111 On the Design Bar. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. 117 In the Filter dialog box. 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. under Sections (Building Sections). click Copy to Clipboard. click . 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. 107 Right-click. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click to select it. The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3.

Do not include the exterior walls. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. click Modify. and components to Level 3. Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls.121 On the View toolbar. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. and click Zoom To Fit. click . Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser. doors. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. 123 Right-click.

Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. and click OK. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Copy to Clipboard. 127 In the Filter dialog box. hold the CTRL key down and select it. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. 132 On the File menu. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. click . this removes it from the selection set. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Save. 129 On the Edit menu. click . Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. 128 On the Edit menu. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. Adding a Roof and Ceiling. 131 On the View toolbar.TIP If you miss a component. 126 On the Options Bar.

double-click Roof. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. 4 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. under Views (all). Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . select Defines slope. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. clear Defines slope. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. 3 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. m_First_Project-in_progress. 7 On the Options Bar. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls.rvt. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor.

16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. select Warm Roof .Timber for Type. 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. click 13 On the View toolbar. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. . and click OK. 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click . 11 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the View toolbar. click Roof Properties. click Finish Roof.9 On the Design Bar.

Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. for Top/Base. Modify the roof 22 Select the roof.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. 21 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . select Attach. 19 On the Options Bar. select Top. for Attach Wall. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. The exterior walls attach to the roof. 20 Select the roof. The exterior wall chain displays as solid red. click Modify.

25 On the Design Bar.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. This returns the roof to its original position. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. under Ceiling Plans. you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. you will use the auto ceiling method. click Modify. 26 On the Edit menu. double-click Level 3. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 29 In the Type Selector. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. click Undo Move. Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. Using the sketch method. ■ In this case. under Views (all). click Ceiling. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling.

as shown. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 . 32 In the Type Selector.

and click OK. and select Shading with Edges. click Modify. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3.34 In the Type Selector. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. click Save. under Constraints. and from the context menu. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 37 In the drawing area. 36 On the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 38 On the View Control Bar. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. 41 On the File menu. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. double-click the section head. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Properties.

click Lines.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In the steps that follow. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. double-click Level 1.rvt. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_First_Project-in_progress. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. select Wide Lines. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. under Views (all). 5 Add the three lines as shown. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. In the image below.

the Run tool is active. and then specify the value. for example: 550 mm. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The dimensions have been predetermined. not to the centerline. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. By default. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. In the steps that follow. click Stairs. You are in sketch mode. and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall.

Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select 900mm Pipe. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 .The stair run is complete. 10 In the Railings Type dialog box. click Railings Type. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar.

and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click the Hide/Isolate control. click the Hide/Isolate control. 12 Select the stairs. 15 Delete the three model lines. 16 On the View Control Bar. 14 Select the three model lines. This makes the model lines more apparent. and select Hide Object. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 13 On the View Control Bar.Notice that the model lines still display.

17 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Building Section). 19 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . under Views (all). 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. click Modify. as needed. double-click Section 1. 21 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. click . select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. Use TAB or zoom in. and click OK.

The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. Do not select the railings. 24 On the Options Bar. SM. and select Copy. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Mirror.NOTE At this time. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. as shown. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. 23 On the Edit menu. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. click .

Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. click 30 On the File menu. Creating the East Wing and Passageway.28 On the Design Bar. 29 On the View toolbar. . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. click Close. click Modify. click Save. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. 31 On the File menu. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors.

Stair railings on Level 3 were added. click Ref Plane. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. zoom out before making the selection.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. If necessary. click the Training Files icon. You use this plane later as the mirror axis.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . expand 3D Views. This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric. click Open. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. under Views (all). Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. 3 In the Project Browser. Additional 3D views were added. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown.

7 On the Edit menu. 6 Press and hold CTRL. click Mirror. 5 In the Project Browser. click and verify that Copy is selected. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . and select the section line to add it to the selection set. under Floor Plans.The entire model displays as selected. double-click Level 1. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously.

13 On the Edit menu. In addition. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. 14 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. If necessary. 20 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify on the Design Bar. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. click Wall. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . as shown. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. select Roof for Height. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. click Delete. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. 11 If necessary. 19 In the Type Selector. click 15 On the View toolbar. The new components are numbered sequentially.After you specify the mirror axis. . a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. 12 Select the reference plane. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original.

23 On the Tools menu. 24 On the Options Bar. split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. as shown below. select Delete Inner Segment. 26 Using the same technique. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . click .Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. When splitting the wall. click Split Walls and Lines. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall.

29 On the Tools menu. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall. 30 On the Options Bar. Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Split Walls and Lines. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit.

double-click Level 1. enter 150 for Offset.31 Using the technique learned previously. click 34 On the View toolbar. Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. click Modify. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall. 38 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View toolbar. Arrows refer to each split location. to turn off thin lines mode. 35 In the Project Browser. 32 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . click . and clear Extend into wall (to core). click Floor. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. under Floor Plans.

click Floor. click Lines. 51 On the Design Bar. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the following illustration. 46 On the Design Bar. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. . When sketching. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.40 On the Design Bar. click the rectangle drawing tool. 52 On the Options Bar. When finished. click Lines. 48 Click Finish Sketch. In this case. 43 On the Tools menu. click Trim/Extend. dimensions have been added for training purposes. NOTE In the following image. and click OK. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. click Floor Properties. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. 41 On the Options Bar. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. click and Lock. double-click Level 2. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

click . click Railing Properties. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. 66 Select the railing. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. click and . If they do.54 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select 1100mm for Type. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . 59 On the Options Bar. 56 Click Finish Sketch. TIP When sketching. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. 61 On the Options Bar. 63 On the Design Bar. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. and click OK. click Lines. If necessary. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. click Floor Properties. 65 On the Design Bar. 58 On the Design Bar. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. as shown. click Railing. click Finish Sketch.

For the next mouse click.67 On the Edit menu. 73 On the Design Bar. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown. and click to set the mirror axis. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. however. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. and modify the direction and shape handles. 68 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. it is faster to mirror it. click Mirror. 75 In the section view. click and Copy. only midpoints will be snapped to. click Section. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. 69 Enter SM. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. continuous line. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. move the cursor to the right.

77 On the Edit menu. under Floor Plans. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. check Defines slope. select Level 3. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. and click OK. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm.76 On the Edit menu. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. 81 Using the zoom commands. If necessary. click Copy to Clipboard. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. double-click Roof. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. click . 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 83 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. 79 On the View toolbar.

86 On the Options Bar. 90 On the Design Bar. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. as shown. as shown. click Trim/Extend. click Finish Roof. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines.85 On the Design Bar. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . clear Defines slope. click Lines. 91 On the View toolbar. 88 On the Tools menu. Exact dimensions are not important. click .

94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. In this case. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. The two roofs are joined. 93 On the Tools menu. click the Model Graphics Style control. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. and click Hidden Line. you select the edge of the passageway roof.Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. Second. click Join/Unjoin Roof. For training purposes. First. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to.

Scheduling the Building Model. click the Model Graphics Style control. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. click . 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Join/Unjoin Roof. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. and click Save. you duplicate the schedule twice. 100 On the View Control Bar.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. you create and modify a door schedule. 98 On the Tools menu. rename each schedule. click Save As. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. 101 On the File menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and select Shading with Edges. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 103 Proceed to the next exercise. After creating the schedule.rvt.96 On the View toolbar. Finally. you modify it to filter by level.

select Family and Type under Available Fields. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. Select Other for Group parameter under.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Project parameter. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. Select Common for Discipline. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. Select Text for Type. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Click OK. TIP If the View tab is not visible. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. Under Parameter Data. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. on the Fields tab. and click Add. 5 Click Add Parameter. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). select Doors for category. enter Hardware for Name. 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. Select Instance. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 4 From the Available Fields list. and click OK.

select Family and Type. 15 Select Mark for Then by. 12 Select Level for Sort by. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Cost.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 26 In the door schedule. 13 Under Sort by. 22 Under Field formatting. and under Field Formatting. 20 Select Right for Alignment. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. 17 Under Fields. select Hidden field. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. 23 Click the Appearance tab. 16 Click the Formatting tab. 24 Select Bold for Header text. 21 Under Fields. 25 Click OK. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. 14 At the bottom of the tab. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. the column is redundant. select Level. select Calculate totals. 19 Under Fields. On the schedule. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. The door schedule displays. Therefore. select Header and select Footer.

32 In the Project Browser. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1.TIP In this view. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. and click OK. and click Properties. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. and press ENTER. enter 500. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. enter Brass. right-click Door Schedule. 28 Click OK. You now have a separate schedule for each level. This is because for this door type. right-click Door Schedule. click Edit for the Filter value. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. 35 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Schedules/Quantities. Cost is a type parameter. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. under Other. However. and click Duplicate. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. each door is allowed a different value. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. and click OK. A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. under Schedules/Quantities. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Rename. and press ENTER.

40 In the Project Browser. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. modify the settings. After rendering. click Save.rvt. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Filter each schedule by their respective level. 41 On the File menu. click OK. 4 Click OK. Rendering the Building Model. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Exterior. 42 Proceed to the next exercise.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter Exterior Scene for Name. click Settings. you create an exterior scene. under Schedules/Quantities. and then render a 3D view using that scene. Under Type. click . 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. double-click each door schedule. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. you capture the image and save it within the project. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New.

and B settings. 10 Click OK. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Good for Quality. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. the building model should resemble the following illustration. G. under Scene Settings. 6 In the Environment dialog box. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. When the rendering process is complete. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 11 In the Environment dialog box. A color bar displays. 15 On the View toolbar. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. This is the background color for the scene. under Scene Settings. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. click the Bars tab. 7 Click the color bar. select Solid Color. 14 Click OK. click Environment. click . click OK. under Background Color. This is a white background color. click Region Raytrace. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 .

An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. On the second sheet.19 On the Design Bar. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. and double-click {3D}. click Save. expand Renderings. you add a rendered view and an elevation view.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 21 In the Project Browser. Documenting the Building Model. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. 22 On the File menu. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. you add this to a sheet. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. click Display Model. In the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Capture Rendering. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 20 On the Design Bar. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise.

click OK to use the loaded titleblock. click Load. and press ENTER. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. The blue text is text that you can modify. 9 Click Owner. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. enter your name. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. The text is not selectable by design. 5 Click Cancel. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component. You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . click Sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Metric Library. You are prompted to select a titleblock.

the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. click Add View. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. the label displays As Indicated. If you add views of different scales.10 On the Settings menu. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. 14 In the Views dialog box. click Project Information. and click OK. In this case. and click Add View to Sheet. referring the reader to the view titles. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name.

click Deactivate View. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and on the context menu. However. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. clear Elevations. click Modify.16 On the Design Bar. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. 23 Select the view. 18 On the View menu. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. click Visibility/Graphics. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. 20 Under Visibility. click Activate View. and on the context menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . 17 Right-click the view. You can work on the building model within this view. 21 Right-click the view. and click OK. Notice the elevation symbols display.

110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 28 In the Project Browser. drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. under Schedules/Quantities.26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. Notice that the scale value has updated.

Creating Your First Building Model | 111 . 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock.29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. 30 Using the column drag handles. adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs.

click OK to use the default titleblock. the Scale label displays As Indicated. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. modify the location and width of the view titles. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102.TIP When the schedule is selected. drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock. Because these two views have different view scales. click Close. 35 In the Project Browser. under Renderings. 36 On the File menu. click Sheet. If necessary. 37 On the File menu. 34 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). notice the z symbol in the center edge. You have completed your first building model. click Save. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . the schedule breaks in half. If you click this. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.

In the first lesson. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. which is independent of the project settings. you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment. you create an office template. Finally. In the second lesson. you modify the system environment. 113 . and set it as your default template.

12 Under Colors. selection default options. These settings control the graphics. click the Graphics tab. 3 In the Options dialog box. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. select Invert background color. When an error occurs. notification preferences. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. under Template file.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. the elements causing the error display using this color. journal cleanup options. 11 In the Options dialog box. 6 In the New Project dialog box. click Training Files. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. 19 On the Design Bar. they are not saved to project or template files. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. and select the wall. click Browse. 16 Click OK. 2 On the Settings menu. click Options. and your username when using worksets. 15 Under Notifications. and click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Graphics tab. 13 In the Color dialog box. click Options. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color.rte in the Metric folder. click Close to close all open projects. and click Open. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. 10 On the Settings menu. 14 Click the General tab. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. 5 On the File menu. click OK. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Wall. and click OK. 9 In the New Project dialog box. click the value for Selection Color. 4 Under Colors. click Modify. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. select yellow.

25 On the File menu. 23 On the File menu. Under Journal File Cleanup. click the Training Files icon. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. as well as the material and rendering libraries. the family template files. 31 Click OK. 20 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Options dialog box. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 28 On the Settings menu. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. Modifying System Settings | 115 . Under Username. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. Select Red for Selection Color. click Close. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 32 On the File menu. These files are used primarily in the software support process. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. click Modify. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. do not save the changes. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. 27 Open the m_Settings. clear Invert background color. click No. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. the family libraries. click Open. click Close. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. click Options. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. If prompted. you specify your default file locations.rvt file located in the Metric folder. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. Your login name displays by default. 24 When prompted to save. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Specifying File Locations. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

3 Under Default template file. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. When you are opening. click . click Browse. You can modify the existing library names and path. saving. 10 Under Libraries. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and you can create new libraries. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. Save. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. 4 Click Cancel.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. 8 Click Cancel. notice the list of library names. 2 In the Options dialog box. However. and click Browse to select a template. TIP To view a template. or loading a Revit Building file. under Default path for family template files. and change the name to My Library. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. select the folder to save your files to by default. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. click Options. 7 In the Options dialog box. 5 Under Default path for user files. centralized. On the File menu. This path is set automatically during the installation process. and click OK. under Libraries. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. and Import dialog boxes. click the File Locations tab. In the following illustration. Load. choose New  ➤ Project. you can start a new project with that template. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. click Browse. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. click Browse. such as in a large. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path.

click My Library. or families. Load. 19 On the Settings menu. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. Specifying Spelling Options. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click the My Library icon. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. and click OK. specify the new location here. select My Library. 14 Under Library Name. click Open. 20 Click the File Locations tab. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. If you want to relocate this path. Save. This path is determined during installation. 25 Click OK. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. If you work in a large office. and select it as the library path. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. TIP You may want to create a new folder first.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. and Import dialog boxes. Modifying System Settings | 117 . 22 Click to delete the library. 16 On the File menu. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 21 Under Libraries. view the current path. and click OK. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. 18 Click Cancel. click Options. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. templates.

If prompted. click Edit.rte in the Metric folder. Modifying Snap Settings. 16 On the Tools menu. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 11 In the Options dialog box. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. 22 In the text editor. enter sheetmtl-Cu. do not save the changes. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Spelling tab. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 25 On the File menu. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 6 On the File menu. 4 Under Personal dictionary. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Edit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Save. 9 In the text editor. click Restore Defaults. you modify snap increments. click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. delete sheetmtl-CU. 17 Click OK. click Options. click the Spelling tab. click Options. scroll down the list of building industry terms. click OK. and then click File  ➤ Exit.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. 2 In the New Project dialog box. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Close. click Exit. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. and click Open. under Template file. click Edit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Exit. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Spelling. 24 In the Options dialog box. click OK. work with snapping turned off. 3 Under Settings. 7 On the File menu. 18 On the Settings menu. 19 In the Options dialog box. click Browse. you modify snap settings. 2 In the Options dialog box. click Training Files. You can turn snap settings on and off. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 20 Under Settings. click Text. 5 In the text editor. 10 On the File menu. click Modify. click Save. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 5 In the New Project dialog box.

As you zoom in and out within a view.6 On the Settings menu. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. If it does not. 9 In the Snaps dialog box. zoom out until it does so. and move the cursor to the right. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. For example. click OK. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If you do not have a wheel button. While sketching. click Snaps. This is the increment that you added previously. click Wall. Modifying System Settings | 119 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. and enter 500 . if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. use the wheel button on your mouse. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 8 Under Object Snaps. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments.

and click Wall. and specify the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. and move the cursor to the right. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. click Close. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Modifying Project Settings. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. and do not save the file. lines. 22 On the Settings menu. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. and object styles. click Modify. and the wall edges. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 25 On the File menu. fill patterns. When you apply a material to a component. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 24 Click OK. click Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. and use it to complete the exercises. annotations. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. You create and modify materials. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 18 Enter SM. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Using these options. Finally. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. If you move the cursor along the wall.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. save the project file with a unique name. the midpoint.. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and delete the value 500 . Notice that snapping is once again active. 21 Move the cursor downward. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

In the steps that follow. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 4 In the New Material dialog box. In the steps that follow. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you render a region to observe the changes. click the Training Files icon. Open m_Settings. Modifying Project Settings | 121 . all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. and click OK. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material.Fieldstone. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Stone for Name. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components.rvt located in the Metric folder. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. enter Masonry . Masonry-Fieldstone. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. 2 Scroll down. click Open. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. When a model component is loaded into a project. 3 Click Duplicate. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. However. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. and select Masonry . this material provides a good foundation for the new material. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. click Materials.

Fieldstone for the name. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click This is the material you created previously. click to select a texture. 25 Click OK three times. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. and double-click Level 1. . and select the remaining two unchanged walls.75 for X and Y. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. 21 In the Value field for Structure. select user from the list of libraries. click the Orientation tab. enter Masonry . 19 Click Duplicate. and select Stone82. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. expand Floor Plans. click the Maps tab. 11 Under Offset. click OK. 15 Click OK. and click . click OK. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. and click Edit. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. click Edit/New. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. 26 Select the right exterior wall. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. on the Material menu. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. and click OK. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box. 28 In the Type Selector. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it.Brick. In the next exercise. and click OK. and click OK. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template.Fieldstone for Name. expand Views (all). 24 In the Materials dialog box. 27 Press CTRL. 7 In the Material Library dialog box. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. 23 On the right side of the Material field.Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. The AccuRender texture Masonry . Before closing the Materials dialog box.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender.Fieldstone material. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . Fieldstone on CMU. click Edit. select Masonry . enter 0. 20 Enter the new wall name.

31 In the drawing area. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. right-click the Design Bar. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. Notice the roof did not render. the rendering process begins. 33 On the File menu. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. and click Rendering. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. Zoom into the model. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. In the following exercise. click Region Raytrace. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. click Save As. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. Controlling Object Styles. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. click Display Model. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. In the exercise.rvt. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. select Region Raytrace. When finished. click . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns.29 On the View Toolbar.

3 Under Pattern Type. click Fill Patterns. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. and double-click East. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. and click OK. choose Model. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Custom. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. such as steel. 10 Under Custom. expand Elevations. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. TIP Typically. click Import. and enter . 12 Click OK. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. and click Open.rvt. 5 Click New. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. m_Settings-in progress.56 for Import scale.pat from the Common folder. select fldstn. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 2 On the Settings menu. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Custom.

Fieldstone. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 18 On the right side of the Materials field. In the Materials dialog box.Fieldstone material. and click OK. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 In the Value field for Structure. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click to select a fill pattern. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types.14 On the Options Bar. For example. click Save. click in the Material field for layer #1. 24 On the Design Bar. TIP If the pattern does not display. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. 19 Under Surface Pattern. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. click OK. under Pattern Type. 22 In the Materials dialog box. click . 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 26 On the View Toolbar. you can set the window frame material to “By Category. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 On the File menu. Controlling Object Styles. select Model.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. click . 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click . 23 Click OK three times. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill. click Modify. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Edit/New. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. there are often multiple window types within a project. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . click Edit.

use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. expand 3D Views.rvt. and double-click 3D Model View. 2 On the keyboard. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. m_Settings-in progress.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

5 On the Options Bar. . 4 Select one of the windows. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Zoom out. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. click Modify. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click the Trim Exterior Material value. click the Trim Exterior value. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click OK. and select the circular window on the second level. click . 18 On the Design Bar. click OK. click Model Graphics Style. click Edit/New. . click . click By Category. click Edit/New. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other.3 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click By Category. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. and click Shading with Edges. under Other.

. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 27 Under Category. 22 Under the Windows category. click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above.rvt.19 On the Settings menu. click 29 On the File menu. expand Windows. 26 On the Settings menu. 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK twice. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. Notice that the external window frames are now white. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .Granite for name. and click in the Material field. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click . and click OK. 24 In the Materials dialog box. 21 Under Category. m_Settings-in progress. click Object Styles. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. click Object Styles. select Trim . expand Windows. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.White for Trim material. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. 23 On the right side of the Material field. click Save. select Trim. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. specify Trim . 28 On the View Toolbar.

7 On the View Control Bar. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. The line style is applied to the roof in all views.rvt. click Line Patterns. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. click New. Modifying Project Settings | 129 .Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. is open with the 3D view active. 10 Select Red for Line Color. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. now you must apply it. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. 8 On the Settings menu. under Category. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. click Object Styles. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. You have created a new line pattern. and click Hidden Line. enter Roof Line for Name. 2 On the Settings menu. m_Settings-in progress. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. click Model Graphics Style. 11 Click OK. select Roofs.

and click OK. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. 24 On the Settings menu. under Category. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. click Line Styles. 18 On the View menu. and select Black for Line Color. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. 17 Click OK. 14 On the Settings menu. 22 Click OK twice. click New. double-click 3D Model View. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. click Object Styles. Notice the site topography and the property lines. double-click Site. select Roofs.12 In the Project Browser. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. click Model Graphics Style. 13 On the View Control Bar. Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. and click Hidden Line. under Floor Plans. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. and select Roofs for Visibility. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. click Visibility/Graphics. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. under 3D Views. Select Blue for Line Color.

29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. click Lines. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . 35 On the Model Categories tab. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. select Zoning Setback. expand Lines. 37 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. click . You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. click Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the View Toolbar. (Make sure you specify a negative value. click Visibility/Graphics. 30 In the Type Selector. 40 Click OK. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. expand Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. Modifying Annotations. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only.27 For the Zoning Setback category. and clear Zoning Setback. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1 Annotated. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. 28 Click OK. Select Red for Line Color. 41 On the View Toolbar. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . click Save. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. click . and click to set the rectangle endpoint. under Floor Plans. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. 38 On the View menu. 34 On the View menu. 42 On the File menu. 36 Click OK. 31 In the Options Bar. 39 On the Model Categories tab.) Click .

In the steps that follow.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 16 In the Tags dialog box. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser.rvt. scroll down to Windows. click Duplicate. You have created a new dimension style.Number. 14 Click Cancel. click . Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. 15 On the Settings menu. 17 Click Load. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Modify. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 2 On the Settings menu. 5 Under Text. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. notice that there is a Linear . 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 7 Click OK twice. click Dimension. In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1 Annotated. m_Settings-in progress. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 18 In the Open dialog box. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. click the default value for Units Format. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. and select M_Window Tag .rvt.Imperial dimension available. is open with the 3D View active. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. 4 Enter the name Linear . under Category. m_Settings-in progress. under Floor Plans. 12 On the Options Bar. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.Imperial and click OK.

Temporary Dimensions. 21 Under Loaded Tags.Number as the assigned tag. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. select one of the window tags that displays the type value. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the Design Bar. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. clear Leader. click Tag. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . you modify the temporary dimension settings. Under Category. Modifying Project Settings | 133 .Number. click Modify. you modify the detail level assignments. click the three left-most windows. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. notice Window Tags appears twice. Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurements. Unless overridden. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. Specifying Units of Measurement. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 32 On the View Toolbar. In the second section. In the first section. the other displays the instance value. M_Window Tag . This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value.In the preview image. 30 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Design Bar. notice that the label displays 1i. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. 28 Under Leader. 19 Click Open. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Create is clear. Leave M_Window Tag .rvt. 22 Click OK.Number.Number. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. In the final section. click Tag All Not Tagged.Number is now the assigned tag. click 33 On the File menu. click M_Window Tag . 29 On the east wall. m_Settings-in progress. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 25 On the left side of the north wall. dimension values display using this setting. 24 On the Options Bar. . select M_Window Tag . click Save. 20 In the Tags dialog box. and Detail Level Options.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Unless overridden. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. In this exercise. click Temporary Dimensions. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. expand Views (all). select meters squared for Unit suffix. Modifying Project Browser Organization. 8 Under Walls. 6 Click OK. select Openings. and click OK. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. dimensions use these project settings. Open c_Project_Browser. expand Floor Plans. In this table. under Length. 5 In the Format dialog box. In this project. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. under Area. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt from the Common folder. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. click Detail Level. and click OK. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. click Open. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. click Save. click the default value for Format. click Close. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 9 Under Doors and Windows. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 13 On the File menu. and expand 3D Views. You do not select a view scale to move it. 3 In the Format dialog box.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. click the default value for Format. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. select Faces. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. and click OK. click Project Units. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 14 On the File menu. click . click the Training Files icon. 12 Click OK. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium.

Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 4 On the Settings menu. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. click Browser Organization. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and click OK. expand each view type. 10 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 6 In the Project Browser.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and notice that each is grouped by discipline. select Type/Discipline. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. 8 Select Phase. under Sheets. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 7 On the Settings menu. click Browser Organization. On the Project Browser.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. click Browser Organization. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. 5 On the Views tab. 14 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . expand Sheets (all). and click OK. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. expand each sheet set. select Discipline. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . and click Apply. and click OK.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically.

you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. Creating an Office Template. Proceed to the next lesson. click Close. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. and click OK. and render scenes in a template. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. click the Folders tab. and expand both Architectural and Structural. and click New. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. In the lesson that follows. View Type (Family and Type). named print settings. If you want to save this file. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. under Views. enter a unique file name. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. 22 On the File menu. In this lesson. and Discipline. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Complete. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. click Browser Organization. When you create new projects. and view names. You can also save these settings in a template file. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. dimensions styles. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. navigate to your preferred directory. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 16 Click the Views tab. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. expand 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you create an office template. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. levels. and click OK.

and click OK. 3 Under Template File. you can select it now. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. the same rules apply. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. drag a zoom region around the level heads. click Close. when you create a new project. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. Modifying Project Settings. Other templates. In that case. When you create a new template based on an existing template. 14 Click Open. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. 13 Select the default template. structural or construction. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. 8 In the Project Browser. select Project for Create new. 11 Under Create New. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. you modify the project settings for your new template. Other than the default template. 6 In the Project Browser. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. For example. click New  ➤ Project. in the drawing area. For example. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. and double-click North. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 9 On the File menu. Whenever you create a new project or template. 7 On the View menu. Creating an Office Template | 137 . certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. for instance. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Project Template. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. click New ➤ Project. 12 Under Template File. and click Open.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. 5 Click OK. 10 On the File menu. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.rte template. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. When you create the material. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. click Browse. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. If you have additional projects open. you select the starting point for your office template. expand Elevations. expand Views. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. such as the structural template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. close them. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.

click Materials. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. create and modify them as needed. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. If you create or modify new materials. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. line patterns. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. specific modifications are not dictated. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. You can align. 2 Scroll down the Name list. rotate. weights. or modify existing patterns. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. see the previous lesson. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. Observe the materials that are already defined. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. line colors. For more details on modifying these settings. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. 3 Under AccuRender. and create the AccuRender material. Choose the appropriate option. you can set line weights. During this exercise. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. click Fill Patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building.In this exercise. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. In the Object Styles dialog box. click Object Styles. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. and move model patterns. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. 8 Click OK when finished. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu.

You can add and delete view scales. modify the line weight. such as walls and windows in orthographic views.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. and click Edit. create new subcategories. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 17 For existing line categories. 18 If necessary. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. 19 Click OK. or line pattern as needed. and one for annotation symbol line styles. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. line color. select it. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 28 Click OK. such as section lines and dimension lines. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. In the dialog box. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. create new line subcategories. and scroll through the list of categories. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. Creating an Office Template | 139 . click Line Weights. one for perspective model line styles. and create new subcategories as needed. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. 31 To modify a line pattern. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 14 Modify categories. click Line Patterns. click Line Styles. 33 Click OK. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. 12 If necessary. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views.

and choose a decimal symbol. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and specify the properties. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. To see the details of a particular style. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 52 Under Length. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. select it from this list. when you add a door with the tag option selected. In the Tags dialog box. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. tags. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. click Duplicate. and radial dimensions are modified separately. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. To see the details of a particular style. name the style. click Project Units. click Duplicate. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. and Angle settings. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 57 Click OK. and dimensions. click Load. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. and click OK. On the Settings menu.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 56 Specify the Slope option. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 49 To load new annotation tags. angular. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. select it from this list. name the style. Volume. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and specify the properties. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. For example. 45 Click OK. click Format. 54 Click OK. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. 39 Click OK. Linear. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area.

59 Under Walls. Rename. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. To move the view scales. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. click Browser Organization. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. 63 Review the table. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. In a typical project. click Temporary Dimensions. or Edit existing organization types. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. Using the arrows between the columns. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. and move view scales as needed. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 64 Click OK.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. click the arrows between columns. 60 Under Doors and Windows. create new browser organization types. 71 If necessary. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. However. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. TIP In the drawing area. 72 Click OK. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. For example. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. Creating an Office Template | 141 . 67 Delete. Medium. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. click Detail Level. or Edit existing organization types. 69 Click the Sheets tab. Rename. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 68 If necessary. click the Views tab. 70 Delete. In such a case. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. create new browser organization types. When you create a new view. or Fine. The detail level is based on view scale. 61 Click OK. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization.

Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. Select it. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. If this selection is satisfactory. See Modifying Views and View Templates. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. and the poche depth. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. 3 To modify. Use the table below as a checklist. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. and click Open. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Depending on the intended use of this template. select Edit/New. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. and make modifications in each area as necessary. You can load any family or group into a template. In the Element Properties dialog box. furniture. Make modifications. If necessary. or electrical fixtures. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. if you loaded every window type you could find. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. click Door. you can set the default contour line interval. phase filters. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. there are some important thoughts to consider. or modify a door. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. you could load detail components. Links to associated tutorials are provided. However. you do both. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. select Load. In the steps that follow. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Obviously. create. and click OK. In addition. If necessary. you can move onto the next component type. the section cut material. This could be useful for things such as hardware. you may want to delete. or use the Project Browser. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. create. you can set up the phases. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. or add to this selection. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. Although the options are endless. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Although this is possible. select from the Options Bar. or load a new door type.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Site Settings If necessary. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. do so before starting this exercise. and electrical fixtures. titleblocks. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. For example. 2 In the Type Selector. If you have not completed the previous exercise. modify. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. notice the list of doors already loaded. Use the instructions in the table below to load. You can find additional information in Help. For example. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. If necessary.

Notice that each family category is listed. Press ESC twice to return to the template. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. and select the titleblock type. Click Duplicate. Creating an Office Template | 143 . select Edit/New. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. and click OK. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with.) 9 Expand the titleblock. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. 6 On the File menu. Modify type properties. 4 Click OK. click Load from Library. expand Families. and click OK. Enter Name.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types.

see Creating a Titleblock Family. click Load. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. To do so. right-click the component. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. create. 12 Click OK. Modifying Views and View Templates. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. you created new projects using different templates.10 On the Options Bar. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this exercise. View Range. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. click View Templates. . you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. To load a titleblock. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. At any time. you create the views required for your template. Discipline. In addition. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. load. and click Delete. you can apply a view template to any view. This titleblock is currently part of the template. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. click 11 Click <<Preview. In addition. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. RELATED For more information. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Detail Level. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. you will first modify view templates. In this exercise.

11 Click Apply. Blue level heads have associated plan views. double-click Level 2. 6 Click OK. Black level heads have no associated views. 23 To add additional levels to the template. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. click Apply. Creating an Office Template | 145 . double-click South. under Floor Plans. 4 If necessary. Notice the level names. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. click Apply View Template. and click OK. In addition. notice that you have the option to rename. and. under Floor Plans. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 15 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Project Browser. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. click Apply. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. you can rename this view according to your preference. Upon the application of the view template. and apply the appropriate template. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. and click OK. click Apply View Template. and elevations. duplicate. review the existing floor plans. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. or delete them as needed. under Elevations. 8 On the View menu. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 21 In the Project Browser. or delete this view. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 12 In the Project Browser. review the floor plans. You can also duplicate or delete the view. select Site Plan. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. ceiling plans. select Make Plan View. 22 In the Project Browser. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. duplicate. click Apply View Template. and then click OK. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. Rename. 24 In the Options Bar. If necessary. 13 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. open the view from the Project Browser. After applying the template. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. expand Views. double-click Site. the view is not linked to the template in any way. in the context menu. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 16 On the View menu. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. and double-click Level 1. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views.

modify settings as needed. 30 In the Project Browser. You are prompted to select a titleblock. You can add schedules to a template. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. on the View toolbar. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. On the Appearance tab. and click OK. On the Formatting tab. and select Rename. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . If necessary.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 36 To save the view. and modify their properties accordingly. select one. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. modify settings as needed. click 33 On the View toolbar. On the Filter tab. select the category type. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. click . 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. click . and click OK. click 29 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dynamically Modify View. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. 31 Rename the 3D View. right-click {3D}. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. assign filters. go to the View menu. under 3D Views. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. click Sheet. To do so. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. expand 3D Views. and click View Properties. You can use this tool. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. to orient and save the view. modify settings as needed. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. on the View toolbar. supply a view name. click Schedule/Quantities. 40 Click OK. select and order required fields. 32 To create additional 3D views.

Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. After the sheet is created. You can still add views to the sheet. click Environment. under Scene Settings. for example. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. and then click OK. Choose from bitmap. it is completely bare. Modifying Render Scene Settings. and click OK. place. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. settings. 8 Under Scene Settings. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. if one exists. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and a Clouds tab appears. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. click Render Scene. select the Clouds option. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. and click Rename. 3 Click OK. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. 7 Click OK. 10 Under Plant Season. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. click Sun. select Exterior. for example. 2 Under Type. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. jpeg. 45 Create new sheets as needed. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. go to the View menu. while in winter. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. Creating an Office Template | 147 . exterior-default. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. if not. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. To do so. and provide a name for the scene. the relevant tab appears. 9 Specify the date and time. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. or targa. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. and colors. select the default titleblock. which is included on the Revit Building CD. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. select the titleblock and delete it. Be sure that you have installed this software. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. for example. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. 5 Specify the background color.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. tiff.

Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. Best is the slowest. click New. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. Good. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. for example Interior . Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. but provides the highest quality. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. but also increases the solution time. Better. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. the quality also is lower. 17 Click OK when finished. Higher values cause longer rendering times. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Modifying Import/Export Settings. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. This works on opaque faces only. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps.Default. This setting is effective for region raytraces. Medium. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. Better. This is a very time consuming operation but. Medium. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Good. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Best. Best. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. and click OK. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. however.

click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. name the file. name the file. and click Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. When you create a multi-category schedule. select Save As. name the file. 5 For each category. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. They cannot be shared with other projects. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. select Save As. 2 For each category. and click Save.txt for MicroStation). Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. project parameters. 9 Select Save As. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and so on. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. These settings are retained within the project template. and they become the set mappings for the project. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. and related multi-category tags and schedules. For example. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). When you import a DWG or DXF file. When scheduling. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. In this exercise. Using Shared Parameters. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. therefore. 8 In the dialog box. and so on.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. for example. Creating an Office Template | 149 . Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Creating Named Print Settings. windows. and click Save. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. project parameters. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. You can save these mappings to a text file. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. doors. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters.

5 Enter the group name. 25 Click OK. 30 On the File menu. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 2 Click Create. This allows you to name the external parameter file. and click Open. select the tag. If a file already exists. click Shared Parameters. For information on creating multi-category tags. 31 Navigate to the directory. you can load them into the template. 22 Add project parameters as needed. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 24 Click Select. and specify the Type. 27 Click OK. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. and click OK when finished. 18 Under Type. 23 To add a shared project parameter. you can create a list of parameters. and click OK. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 Click Add. 7 Under Parameter group. 10 Click OK. click Project Parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 21 Click OK. 11 For each parameter group. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. you may want to save the file to a network location. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. After the file is named. 8 Under Parameters. select Project parameter. click New. enter a parameter name. 9 Name the Parameter. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. The tag is now part of the template. or use the Help documentation for assistance. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. select a parameter discipline type. under Groups. 17 Under Discipline. select a group that you want to add parameters to. 3 Name and save the file. you can begin creating parameter groups. click Add. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. 16 Under Name. select a parameter value type. click New. add required parameters. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. and choose a shared parameter.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. For each parameter group. and select Shared Parameter.

2 Under Name. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. 15 Name the template. you create named print settings. you can set options such as sheet sizes. click New. 11 Click OK when finished. and click Save. By going first to the Print command. click Schedule/Quantities. Creating Named Print Settings. Depending on your office environment. 36 When you have completed the schedule. you need only select a setting. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. By creating named settings within the template. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. The only remaining task is to save it. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. Your template is complete. and print. 9 In the Print dialog box. make minor modifications if necessary.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Print. Save the template 12 On the File menu. For each printer. If you need to share this file with others. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. you should save it to a network path. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and click OK. click OK. and the percent of actual size. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. Creating an Office Template | 151 . enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click Setup. select a different printer. and make it your default template file. 14 Under Save as type.rte). click Setup. enter a name for the schedule. select Template Files (*. 34 Under Name. 5 In the New dialog box. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. and create additional settings as needed. and create new settings for this printer. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 3 Under Settings. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. click Save. paper placement. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. save the file as a template. 6 Modify the printer settings. 4 Click Save As. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed.

and click Open. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. go to the File menu. In addition. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. select it. 21 Click the File Locations tab. In this lesson. 18 Select the template. If you have a project. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . This can provide a good starting point for a template. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. By investing the time to individualize your template.Use the template 16 To use the template. 17 Select Browse. loaded components. and click New  ➤ Project. 24 Click OK. 23 Navigate to the template location. you modified settings. In addition. 22 Next to Default template file. You can also set this template as your default template. and saved them to a template. click Browse. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. and click Open. 19 Click OK. click Options.

You can also create ceilings by sketching them. see the online Help. and how to create a compound ceiling. 153 . you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. For more information. You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select.

Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. select it. Open c_Ceiling. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . expand Views (all). click Ceiling.rvt located in the Common folder. click Open. click the Training Files icon. The ceiling is displayed. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise. when the room boundary highlights. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. After you add ceilings to the model. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. expand Ceiling Plans. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. and double-click Level 1. You add four different types of ceilings. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 In the Type Selector. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids.

when the room boundary highlights. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. select it. click in the Material type parameter Value field.5 Select the lower center room and. and click OK. click Edit/New. it displays in the Type Selector. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. click . 6 In the Type Selector. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Name dialog box. 15 In the Materials dialog box. under Name. click Duplicate. under Materials and Finishes. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid.Interior .Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. select Finishes . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Creating Ceilings | 155 . and then click . The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. When selected. 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. click Modify. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. click OK. click OK. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box.

you learn how to create a compound ceiling. Open c_Condominium. you change the project to Metric. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Common folder. on the File menu. and then add the ceiling to the building model. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and double-click First Floor. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . add layers of material to the ceiling type. The original project units are imperial. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click the Training Files icon. click Save As. You create a new ceiling type. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Ceiling Plans. click Open.18 If you want to save your changes. In the steps that follow. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets.

Gypsum Wall Board. under Thickness. under Thickness. under Layers. under Material. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. select Finishes . enter Gypsum board on metal furring. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value. select Metal . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Ceilings | 157 . under Thickness. click OK. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Material.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. under Construction. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. click OK. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. click Project Units. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Name dialog box. 5 In the Project Units dialog box. click Ceiling. click Insert twice to add two new layers. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. select Metal . 7 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Material. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. specify Millimeters for units.Furring. click OK. click .Cold Rolled Channel. and click OK.Interior . enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. click the format button for length. 4 In the Format dialog box. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. click Edit/New. click Preview to display the current layers. and click OK. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling.

click the Detail Level control. on the File menu. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. click Save As. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. and double-click Section 1. and save the exercise file with a unique name.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all). You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. expand Sections (Type 1). Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 23 If you want to save your changes. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . 21 On the View Control Bar. and click Fine.

159 . You can cut vertically through a selected floor. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. or ceiling. roof. In the exercises that follow. floors. floor. In addition. or ceilings using the Opening command. or ceiling. When creating a hosted opening. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer.

Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. the project must have an existing dormer. notice the existing dormer. In this case. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. click Open. the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. click the Training Files icon. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry.

and click Modelling. right-click the Design Bar. The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. expand Floor Plans. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . and. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. expand 3D Views. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. expand Views (all). select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click to select it. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. and click OK. WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. under Views (all). The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. when the edges of the roof highlight.2 In the Project Browser. Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Select the main roof to be cut. This is an interior 3D view.Dormer. click Opening. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. and double-click Attic View. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. and double-click Roof .

a bottom face of a floor. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. 8 Zoom in around the dormer. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. an edge of the roof to be cut. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . you define the boundary of the dormer opening. a side face of a wall. when it highlights.Next. select it. and.

Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . double-click Attic View. 10 Select the lower sketch line. 14 In the Project Browser. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. and notice the drag controls on each end. click Finish Boundary. 12 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. click Modify. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. click Open. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click . NOTE If you want to save this file. 2 Using the spin function. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar.rvt located in the Metric folder. select Save As from the File menu. click the Training Files icon. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings .15 On the File menu.

select it. click Modify. select Pick a face of a roof. click . right-click the Design Bar.3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . In the following illustration. and click OK. when it highlights. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. and. click Opening. 7 On the Options Bar. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. The opening on the right is cut vertically. and click Modelling. floor.

10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. select it.9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 166 | Chapter 5 Openings . when it highlights. and.

click the Training Files icon. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. You can move it. notice the tool displays. select Save As from the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Close.The opening is an element independent of the roof. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. 11 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you want to save this file. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. and constrain it like any other element. and click Finish Sketch. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. . 2 Using the spin function.rvt located in the Metric folder. Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. click Open. dimension it. click . If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click 12 On the File menu. Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . change the shape.

3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click OK. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof. click Opening. select it. when it highlights. floor. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. In the following illustration. click Modify. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . right-click the Design Bar. and. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. and click Modelling. select Pick a roof. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. or ceiling and cut vertically.

click Lines. 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. 9 On the Design Bar. select it. 8 In the Project Browser. and double-click Roof . click . 12 On the Design Bar.Because the cut is vertical. 10 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch.Dormer. when it highlights. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. expand Floor Plans. and. expand Views (all). click . 13 On the View Toolbar. it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view.

change the shape. NOTE If you want to save this file. Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. . 15 On the Options Bar. notice the tool. click 16 On the File menu. You can move it. and double-click Section 1. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. expand Views (all). you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson.rvt located in the Metric folder. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . click Open. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. select Save As from the File menu. and constrain it like any other element. In this exercise. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. click Close. dimension it. and click Finish Sketch. click the Training Files icon.The opening is an element independent of the roof.

and the level 1 and 2 lines. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. floor. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway. Before cutting the floor opening. In the following illustration. However.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Modelling. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Opening. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. click Ref Plane. or ceiling and cut vertically. and click OK. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. select Pick a roof. The first click specifies the start point. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 .

12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. If you intend to complete the next exercise. select Floor Plan: Level 2. and click Wireframe. 8 On the View Control bar. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. you may close the project with or without saving it. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. click Model Graphics Style. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . You are prompted to select a view. Otherwise. the stairs. under Sections (Filled Arrow). under Views (all). click Finish Sketch.6 Select the floor on Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar. and the reference plane you added previously. and click Open View. click . NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. Notice the new floor opening. 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. click Lines. 10 On the Options Bar. do so now.

select Pick a roof. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click the Design Bar. and click OK. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. click Finish Sketch. double-click Section 1. double-click Level 1 Interior View. select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. and click Modelling. 5 On the Options Bar. the interior face of the wall. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. click . Notice the new ceiling opening. or ceiling and cut vertically. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. under Sections (Filled Arrow). under 3D Views. Use the following illustration as a guide. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . Cut a ceiling opening. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and click Open View.Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. under Views (all). 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. 7 On the Design Bar. click Opening. 8 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). floor.

However. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The first click specifies the start point. NOTE If you want to save this file. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. however. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. Before cutting the opening. expand Views (all). 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. and the level 1 and 2 lines.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. you must sketch in a plan view. click the Training Files icon. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height.10 On the File menu. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . click Ref Plane. click Close. select Save As from the File menu. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. and double-click Section 1. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level.

under Constraints. double-click Section 1. click Lines. click . the stairs. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . click Properties. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint. and click OK. and the reference plane you added previously. and click Wireframe. select Create shaft opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. under Sections (Filled Arrow). 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. 6 In the Go To View dialog box. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Enter 3400 for Base Offset.4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Opening. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 14 Click OK. 7 On the View Control bar. under Views (all). but does cut the ceiling of level 1. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. and click Modelling.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings . ceiling.Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. Using the shaft tool. you can cut a single opening through every floor. and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening.

and panels. posts. balusters. 177 .Railings 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails.

you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. 3 On the File menu.Newel. you create a railing and add components to it.Creating Railings In this lesson. Open five component families 1 On the File menu. click Lines. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. M_Post .Square w Ball.Custom3. verify that DefaultMetric. 7 On the Options Bar.rfa. select Chain. press the CTRL key. click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box. and click Open. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. M_Baluster Panel 1. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise.rfa. select M_Baluster .rfa.Custom4. and click OK. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Before you lay out the railing. M_Baluster . 4 In the Open dialog box. 6 On the Design Bar. Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters.rfa . and M_Post . such as panels.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown. Project is selected under Create new. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components. between the balusters.rfa. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . click Railing.

click Edit/New. and then click . click Edit for Rail Structure. In row 2. enter Bottom for Name. enter 300 mm for Height. click in the Material field. and click OK. enter Top for Name. 19 In the Materials dialog box. . select Metal . click Duplicate. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box.Dark Gray. Creating Railings | 179 . Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. in row 2. click Insert. Matte for Name. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. click Railing Properties. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. and click OK. click in the Material field. enter -25 mm for Offset. select Metal . and click OK. 13 In the Name dialog box. In row 2. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1. 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. In row 2.Paint Finish .Paint Finish . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box.Dark Gray.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. In row 2. and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Matte for Name. 16 In row 1.

click Edit for Baluster Placement. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . click Shading with Edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . 31 On the Design Bar. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. from previous. select M_Post. 32 On the Toolbar. in row 1. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing.Glass for Baluster Family.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 Click OK three times.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 34 On the File menu. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. from previous. click . Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.rvt.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. A new row is displayed. click Finish Sketch. click on row 2. select M_Post . 33 On the View menu. Adjusting Railing Parameters. and then click Duplicate. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. under Main pattern. select M_Post. 28 In row 2. Select Bottom for Base. under Construction. enter 230 mm for Dist.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset. click OK. from previous. under Posts. 24 In row 3. 23 In row 2. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 25 In row 4. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. 29 In row 3. Select Bottom for Base.

2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. select End for Justify. under Main pattern. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. expand Views (all). The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Main pattern. Training_Railing. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 13 Click OK three times. select Center for Justify. click . 4 On the Options Bar. under Construction. 8 Click OK three times.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. click . The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 18 Click OK three times. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click East. click Modify and select the railing. under Construction. click Edit/New. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Main pattern. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. under Construction. expand Elevations. click Edit/New. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Railings | 181 .

click Edit/New. select M_Baluster . under Construction. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 Click OK three times. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . under Main pattern. click . click Edit/New. Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill.Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. click . 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 Under Posts. View post options 29 On the Options Bar. select Beginning for Justify. custom baluster excess length fill. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Toolbar. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. and spacing options. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Construction. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. enter 54 degrees for Angle. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit/New. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 34 Click OK three times. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 23 Click OK three times. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. under Main pattern. click . click . under Construction.

44 On the File menu. click Modify and select the railing. from previous. a corner post does not occur. 37 On the Options Bar. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. click . 42 Click OK three times. In row 4. The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. from previous. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Edit/New. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. enter 0 mm for Dist. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. double-click East. Creating Railings | 183 . Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. under Elevations. under Main pattern.rvt. 41 Under Posts. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 380 mm for Dist. 43 In the Project Browser.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

you learn how to add fascia. and soffits to the roofs that you create.Roofs 7 In this tutorial. 185 . gutters. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building. In addition.

you learn to create several different types of roofs. 4 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. You do not need to create the work plane. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise.Creating Roofs In this lesson. and double-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Name. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. Before you can sketch the roof profile. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and click OK. 5 In the Go To View dialog box. expand Views (all). Open m_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. shed. including hip. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and mansard roofs. click the Training Files icon. gable. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 1 In the Project Browser. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.rvt located in the Metric folder. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Open.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. Creating Roofs | 187 . click Ref Plane. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.

sketch the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Lines. select Chain. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

click . 19 On the Tools toolbar. Creating Roofs | 189 . so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 17 On the Tools toolbar. The roof should resemble the following illustration. click . use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. press CTRL. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and double-click Section 1. and select the second wall. expand Sections (Type 1). click to display the model. click Modify. press TAB. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Next. expand Views (all). 21 In the Project Browser.16 On the View toolbar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model.24 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Attach for Top/Base. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

click Finish Roof. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Dimensions. and on the Options Bar. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 10 Press CTRL. and click OK. and click Open View. sketch the roof footprint. click . 3 Next. click Pick Walls. verify that Defines slope is selected. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Creating Roofs | 191 . 4 On the Options Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 7 On the Options Bar. By default. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. select both slope definition lines. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. Next. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. clear Defines slope. m_Roofs. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope.rvt. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. click Modify. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. and enter 600 for Overhang.

Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. press TAB. clear Defines slope.14 On the View toolbar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.rvt. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. 3 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Level 3. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. When you complete the roof. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click Pick Walls. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. m_Roofs.

6 Click to select all the walls. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. add new slope lines to the roof. 13 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. Next. click . 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Finish Roof. 10 On the View menu. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Lines. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Roofs | 193 . sketch the chimney opening. 15 On the Options bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog box. 9 Using automatic snaps. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. 1 In the Project Browser. select Defines slope. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to view the new roof in the model. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. and double-click Level 2. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.18 On the View toolbar. m_Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.rvt. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.

Creating Roofs | 195 . You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. click Lines. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. close the roof sketch. 11 To trim the first line segment. and click . and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.Next. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. click . 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools toolbar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. clear Defines Slope. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. select the left vertical slope definition line. 7 On the Options Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. Next.

The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Roof Properties. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click Modify. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 14 Under Constraints. and click OK. click Finish Roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.Next. 18 On the Design Bar. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. click 17 Click to display the model. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. join the two remaining walls to the roof.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint.23 On the Tools toolbar. Creating Roofs | 197 . click . 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. and enter 300 for Overhang. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. m_Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and press ENTER. click Roof Properties. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 16 Under Constraints. Next. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. Next. click . 10 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and click OK. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. press TAB. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . enter 0 for Overhang. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. you add a slope-defining line.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. select Defines slope. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. select the left vertical roof line. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.

2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click to activate the roof footprint sketch. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 4 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. 9 On the Tools menu. and double-click 3D. Creating Roofs | 199 . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. 1 In the Project Browser. click .rvt. 5 On the View menu. expand Views (all). expand Views (all). 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 On the Options Bar.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. To help locate the position of each split. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Before you can add slope arrows. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and enter 600 for Offset. you need to add two reference planes. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. expand 3D Views. and double-click Level 2. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Floor Plans. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. m_Roofs.

12 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. and then click OK. add two new slope arrows. click Modify. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 20 Under Dimensions. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Slope Arrow. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 18 Press CTRL. . and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. and click 19 Under Constraints. select both slope arrows.Next. select Slope for Specify. verify is selected. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope.15 to add the second slope arrow. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. Aligning Roof Eaves. 11 On the Design Bar.

The eave lines display with a dimension.rvt. 13 On the View toolbar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 6 With the two gable end lines selected.Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. Next. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. select Defines Slope. expand Views (all). and double-click Garage Roof. click Align Eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. expand Floor Plans. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. select a method to align the eaves. under Dimensions. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. When you sketch a hip roof. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. and click OK. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. click . the adjacent eave heights must align. When eave heights differ. Creating Roofs | 201 . 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. click to display the model. 5 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. When aligning eaves. click . 12 On the Design Bar.

under Constraints. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 3 Select the roof and. click Open. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Elevations. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. and double-click North. on the File menu. expand Views (all). 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. Open m_Mansard_Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. Creating a Mansard Roof. click . click Modify. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.14 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar.

16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. expand Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click to display the model.6 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. click . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. Next. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions. and double-click Level 3. and click OK. expand Views (all). press TAB. and then select Defines slope. 7 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click . Creating Roofs | 203 . and select the remaining three lines. click Lines. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

gutters. click Duplicate. open the Metric Library folder. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name.18 If you want to save your changes. you can easily create its fascia. and click OK twice. and Soffits In this lesson. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 3 Press CTRL.rfa. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click . 2 In the Open dialog box. enter Built-up Fascia. Creating Fascia. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and soffits. under Construction. Gutters. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. open the Profiles folder. 1 On the File menu. and click OK. Open c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. you learn how to create roof fascia. 8 In the Name dialog box. click Save As. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. gutters. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 5 On the Options Bar. After you create a roof. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. click Open.rvt located in the Common folder. and soffits in Revit Building. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click the Training Files icon. and open the Roofs folder. and click Open.

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. and Soffits | 205 . Creating Fascia. Creating Gutters. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Gutters.

2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Properties dialog box. and then click . 10 Click to place the gutter. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 8 In the Materials dialog box. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. Creating Soffits. click in the Value field for Material. under Construction. Creating Soffits In this exercise. click .rvt. and click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Duplicate. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click Edit/New. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. and click OK three times. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . select Metal-Aluminum for Name. c_Condominium. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box.

3 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the roof. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. 6 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. and Soffits | 207 . and double-click Roof. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. expand Views. Gutters. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. and double-click 3D. click Pick Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Creating Fascia.

and then select the soffit to join them. on the File menu. 8 Select the roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name.7 On the Tools menu. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. click Join Geometry. 9 If you want to save your changes. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

209 . and work with a stair calculator. you learn how to create and modify straight. You learn to create special feature stairs.Stairs 8 In this tutorial. u-shaped. and semi-circular runs of stairs. add railings to your landings.

The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view.Creating Stairs In this lesson. expand Views (all). The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. specify the start point for the stair run. and double-click Level 1. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. risers and stringers. such as treads. 2 On the View menu. You learn to work with different stair components. click Stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and then modify. select Level 2 for Underlay. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Click OK. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing. click Open. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. click the Training Files icon. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. railings from another project. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. expand Floor Plans. add. click View Properties. you can display both of the levels that you are working with. under Graphics.

Creating Stairs | 211 . click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown.

The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level.Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run. 212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown. 11 On the Toolbar. click .

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. enter Exit Stairs for Name.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Metal . 15 In the Materials dialog box. and then click Stairs Properties. 18 Click OK three times. click Duplicate. Dark Gray Matte for Name. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 8 Under Dimensions. 16 Under Materials and Finishes.Paint Finish. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. Dark Gray Matte for Name. and then click Edit/New.The new reference plane. measured from the exterior wall centerline. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . under Treads. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. is at 864.Paint Finish. select for Tread Material Value. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. select Finishes . select Metal .Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. click Stairs. 14 Under Materials and Finishes. 13 In the Materials dialog box. 17 In the Materials dialog box. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 915 mm for Width. select for Stringer Material Value. select for Riser Material Value. Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown.

The exit stair run layout is complete. 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown. Creating Stairs | 233 .21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown.

click Finish Sketch. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell.23 On the Design Bar. View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. and the exit door. and double-click Exit Stairs. expand Views (all).

click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. click . and select both railings. select M_Baluster . select Railing : 900mm Pipe. The selected objects are hidden. 29 On the Design Bar. hold down CTRL. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run.27 On the View Control Bar. Creating Stairs | 235 . 30 In the Type Selector.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. in row 2. under Posts. and the exit stairs are visible. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction. click Edit/New. 35 Click OK three times. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Modify. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 31 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. and click OK. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. 40 On the File menu. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. and select the exit stairs. under Constraints. click . click Save. 37 On the Options Bar. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing.

TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. Under Stringers. expand Floor Plans. select Concrete . click Duplicate. and click OK. and click OK. select Monolithic Stairs. click . select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. select Concrete . Under Treads. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. select 9 In the Materials dialog box. Under Risers. select for Monolithic Material Value. and click Edit/New. enter 1300 mm for Width. click Run. and click OK. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. and then click Stairs Properties. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. Under Risers. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. Training_Stairs. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. Creating Stairs | 237 . enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. for Tread Material Value. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. Under Risers.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. Under Treads. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. click Stairs. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers.rvt. 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. 11 In the Materials dialog box. Under Construction. 6 In the name dialog box. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. and double-click Level 1. expand Views (all).

enter 1310 for Radius as shown. and press ENTER. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 18 On the keyboard.17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. and click to specify the arc end point. as shown. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. The semi-circular stair run is complete.

expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. Creating Stairs | 239 .20 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad. and double-click Exterior Stairs.

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

Click OK. and in the Materials dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. select Wood . click Duplicate. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. click . ■ Creating Walls | 259 . 13 In row 1. 8 In the Name dialog box. Click in the Material field. select Finishes . Enter 135 mm for Thickness. 11 Select row 2. under Name. select Finishes . under Name. and click Up. and select Structure [1].GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select Finish 1 [4]. Click in the Material field. Click in the Material field. and click OK. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Click OK. click . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. under Layers.Exterior Insulation and Finish System. click . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. and click Down twice. 12 Select row 3. click Insert twice. click Edit for Structure.Exterior . Enter 50 mm for Thickness.5 On the Options Bar. and select Finish 2 [5]. under Name. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. ■ 14 In row 3. Enter 15 mm for Thickness.Interior . and in the Materials dialog box. click Edit/New. . ■ 15 In row 5. and in the Materials dialog box. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box.EIFS .Stud Layer. Click OK.

21 Select Generic . 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. 22 In the Type Selector. right-click. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser.16 Click Preview.200mm. expand Walls. and expand Basic Wall. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . click Detail Level ➤ Medium. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. 25 On the Options Bar. 17 Click OK three times. click Dimension. 24 On the Design Bar. expand Families. Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. and click Select All Instances. select Wall centerlines for Prefer.

28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point. The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays. Creating Walls | 261 . Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. select Wall faces for Prefer.27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point.

select Faces of core for Prefer. The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays.31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. 34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls . 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point.

Creating Walls | 263 .35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays. 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point.

43 Click OK twice. and double-click Callout of Section 3. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Settings menu.pat. click OK. click Materials. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view.Glass Reinforced Gypsum. 47 In the Materials dialog box. and click Import. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data. and click OK. and click Open. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. select Gypsum. select Custom. 45 In the Materials dialog box. click Fill Patterns.Dense for Import. expand Sections (Callout 1). click for Pattern. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. 50 On the View Control Bar.GRG . 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand . select revit. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls . 41 In the Import dialog box. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. click New. select Finishes . 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. and under Cut Pattern.25 for Import scale. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Enter Gypsum for Name. Enter 0.Interior .

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

and select Top for Attach Wall. expand Elevations. click Attach for Top/Base.Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . and double-click South. 5 Select the south wall. expand Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane.

and select Top for Attach Wall. 9 Select the north wall. click Attach for Top/Base. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane.8 In the Project Browser. double-click North. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. under Elevations. Creating Walls | 285 .

expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. This also completes the Walls lesson. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls . This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise.12 In the Project Browser.

Like windows. panel. and you can change these elements individually. grid lines. and mullions. To change grids. and they are not windows. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. To switch panel types. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Unlike windows. Like walls. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. 287 . or you can use a specific curtain system command. you need to select a panel.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. to resize the system. you select the grid. you need to change the length of the wall. This affects the entire curtain system. For example.

rvt file located in the Metric folder. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and double-click Ground Floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. expand Floor Plans. you create a curtain system using the wall command. click the Training Files icon. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 4 On the Type Selector. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building.

Flat Curtain System | 289 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.

10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. 9 On the View menu. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. expand 3D Views. and click OK. expand Views (all). 12 Under Constraints. and room bounding. and double-click Southeast Isometric. top constraint. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 11 Select the curtain system and click . 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint.8 In the Project Browser. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top and base attachments.

16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click OK.a. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 20 In the drawing area. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click Rename. using curtain grids. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. click Curtain Grid. Flat Curtain System | 291 . the curtain system is a single glazed panel. click Elevation. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Right now. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and resize the crop boundary as shown.

33 On the Design Bar. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Copy to Clipboard. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 27 On the Edit menu.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. one larger than the other. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . SIXTH FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. Click to create a vertical grid. and click OK. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. click Curtain Grid. THIRD FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. 28 On the Edit menu. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. click Modify. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 29 In the Select Levels dialog box. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. Click to place another grid line.

you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Flat Curtain System | 293 .Next. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. The segment line style changes to dashed. click Add or Remove Segments. Instead. You do not use the Door command. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 38 Using the same method. The two segments are removed. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then select the segment above it.

select One Segment. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. 43 Delete the dimensions. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .39 On the Design Bar. Use the following picture as a guide. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click Curtain Grid. and lock them. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar.

double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. and click Open. 56 In the Project Browser. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 50 In the Doors folder. 49 On the File menu. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Next. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. click Modify. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click in any white space to exit the editor. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Flat Curtain System | 295 . Now. and click Wireframe. 52 On the Type Selector. Next. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. The panel changes to a double door. 55 In the Project Browser.rfa. not as curtain panels. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. on the new curtain system you added. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. under Elevations. They are part of the curtain panel category. under Floor Plans. 54 On the Design Bar. These panels schedule as doors. double-click Entrance Elevation. This changes the graphics style of the view. click . click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 57 On the View Control Bar.

and the solid panels display in white. 66 On the View Control Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 61 With the panel still selected.rvt. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. The glazed panels display in blue. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 65 On the View Control Bar. 60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. 68 On the File menu. click . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Save As. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click System Panel : Solid. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. 9 Delete the mullions below them. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. there are a few that you do not want. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. select Grid Line Segment. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Flat Curtain System | 297 . so you remove them next. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. however. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. You are going to change some mullion joins. 6 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments.

Two mullion join controls display. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 13 Click the top mullion control. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

4 On the Type Selector. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Finally. click Modify. double-click Southeast Isometric. 5 Click . You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and click OK. double-click Ground Floor. 15 In the Project Browser.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 6 Under Constraints. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. Finally. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. 14 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 16 Save the file. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. under Floor Plans. click . This completes the exercise for adding mullions. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Curved Curtain System | 299 . click Wall. you add a curtain system using the wall command. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc.

Divide the halves into quarters. you place grids on the system. click Curtain Grid. You are going to use one of these snaps points. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. eighths. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 15 In the Project Browser. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. under Elevations. and then sixteenths.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. double-click East. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Next.

19 On the Type Selector. click Basic Wall: Generic . click Modify. Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. select the bottom layer of panels. Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file.300mm. Curved Curtain System | 301 . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next. you change some panels in the system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.17 On the Design Bar.

1 On the File menu. . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Elevations. 9 Select the extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click .rft. and on the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . enter 100 for Depth. 11 On the Design Bar. click Model Lines. double-click Exterior. click Lines. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. and click . specify Glass for Subcategory. 10 Under Identity Data. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 2 In the Metric templates folder. and click OK. click New ➤ Family. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection.

15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. click System Panel . . 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. and click Flip Orientation.Pattern.rfa.Pattern. 16 On the File menu. 22 Right-click. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. click curved curtain system. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc. 20 On the Type Selector. select Curtain Panel .Pattern.rfa family. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. All fifth floor panels are selected.13 On the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. click Modify. under Floor Plans.Solid. 23 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Project Browser. All the panels change to the solid panel. 14 On the File menu. and save the family as Curtain Panel . Curved Curtain System | 303 . All fourth floor panels are selected. and then click . 26 On the Type Selector. and return to your project file. 17 Load the Curtain Panel . click Save As. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.

7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. click Lines. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. 6 On the Settings menu. click Mullion. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . double-click Metric Profile. under Elevations. 9 On the Options Bar. double-click East. 8 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. For vertical mullions. click Family Category and Parameters. click . 1 In the Project Browser. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 27 Save the file. click New ➤ Family.rft. enter 8 for Sides. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. and click OK.

clear Fine. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click OK.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion . Curved Curtain System | 305 . Click again to specify the ending point. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays.detail. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the File menu. click Visibility. click Detail Component. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 18 On the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder.

it can be added as a mullion type. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 Click Edit/New.20 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Visibility. 31 Click .rfa. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. and click OK. so next you remove the unwanted ones. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 29 Click . under 3D Views. click Duplicate. 36 Under Construction. 38 On the Options Bar. You have placed more mullions than you want. 30 On the Modelling tab. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 41 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Mullion. and click OK. double-click Southeast Isometric. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view.rfa family. clear Coarse and Medium. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 21 Select the detail component. select All Empty Segments. click Modify. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 37 Click OK twice. and return to the project file. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 26 On the File menu. After the new profile is loaded. 40 On the Design Bar. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. click Save As. select Circular Mullion for Family. and click DELETE. 28 In the Project Browser. click Modify to exit placing mullions. 23 On the File menu. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

select Defines slope. All the inside faces highlight. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. double-click TOP OF ROOF. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 4 On the Design Bar. and a ruled curtain system. 1 In the Project Browser. you learned to create a curved curtain system. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and press TAB. and you can click to select them all. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. make custom curtain panels and mullions. click Pick Walls. and then apply those custom elements to the system. a storefront system. In this lesson. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. TIP To chain select all the walls.43 Save the file.

double-click Southeast Isometric. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 15 On the Options Bar. Storefront System In this exercise. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system.7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 19 Save the file. click Roof Properties. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. under 3D Views. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 9 Under Constraints. 11 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof. 17 On the Design Bar. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 10 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This curtain wall cuts the original wall. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . and enter 2400. 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 4 On the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 5 On the Options Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. click Wall. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. under 3D Views. For this wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. Justification (Grid 1). 12 Select the storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. Under the Pattern heading. Angle (Grid 1). 9 On the Design Bar. Click OK. you find Number (Grid 1). which is specified in the type. 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. and click .8 Click the temporary dimension. To see how the grid layout is defined. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. click Modify. center. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. see the Revit Building help. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. 10 In the Project Browser. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. enter 10200 mm. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. and press ENTER. even if the wall height changes. or end. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. double-click Southeast Isometric. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. This specifies an exact length for the wall. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. and Offset (Grid 1).

Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 1 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. under 3D Views. double-click Southeast Isometric.16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. 3 On the View Control Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In this exercise. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 18 Save the file. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 17 Select a curtain grid.

7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and highlight the thin line. 8 Select the highlighted line. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. 6 Click the highlighted line.

Finally. and define a ruled curtain system. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 9 Select the panel. 15 On the Type Selector. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. quarters. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. and then eighths. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. Next. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 17 Save the file. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. and click . place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. click System Panel : Solid. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. click Curtain Grid. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. quarters. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

three-dimensional views. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. usually contain a title block. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. which are a type of view in a project. and are accessible from the Project Browser. 315 . begin by first creating sheets. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. section. and schedules. elevation.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. Sheets are defined by borders.

Next. how to add views to the sheets. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. click Open. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. click the Training Files icon.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. adjust the view scale. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. how to create new views from a building model. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan.

expand Views (all). double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. lighting fixtures. 9 Under Visibility. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and click Rename. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click Level 1. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. furniture.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Turn off visibility for casework. click Edit for Project Address. and click Duplicate. 5 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. click Project Information. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. furniture. The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. 2 Under Floor Plans. Casework. enter Level 1 Furniture. click the Model Categories tab. and expand Floor Plans. Casework. A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser. furniture.

select A0 metric. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. and click View.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. Enter J. 16 Click OK. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and click OK. MA 12345 14 Click OK. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Enter Residence for Project Name. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. click Sheet. right-click. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. Smith for Client Name. Enter Client Approved for Project Status. 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.

and select the title block. expand Sheets (all). enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. View scale is a property of the view.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. select Floor Plan: Level 1. click Modify. click Add View. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . under Identity Data. 21 When the title block highlights. 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. 25 In the Views dialog box. 19 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. click . 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar.Unnamed. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box.

on the View menu. under Graphics. click Deactivate View. 32 Select the viewport. click Activate View. 28 Right-click the view. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. The border and title block are grayed out. select 1:20 for View Scale. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. and click View Properties. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. click Viewport : Title w Line. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and click View Properties. and click OK.27 With the view selected. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. right-click. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. indicating the view is deactivated. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . 36 On the Options Bar. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. click Dimension. and click Activate View. as shown in the following illustration. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. click . 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. as shown in the following illustration.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. and select Wall faces for Prefer. and click to place the dimension. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. click Modify. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner).

The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Adding a Sheet to the Project. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Dimensions. double-click Level 1 Furniture. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. are specific to the view in which they are created. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and the door is updated. however. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. double-click Level 1. right-click. and click Deactivate View. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed.41 Select the view.

the new sheet. you add a new sheet to the project. The sheet is incrementally named A102. under Identity Data. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. is displayed. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 Select the title block. click Sheet. m_Drawing_Exercise.rvt. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click .Furniture Plan Level 1. select A0 metric. In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . under Sheets (all). A102 . add the furniture plan view. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and on the Options Bar.

right-click on the view on sheet A102.Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. click the scale value. under Floor Plans. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click A102 . click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. m_Drawing_Exercise. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area. 4 In the Type Selector. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture. and click Activate View. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. 3 On the Design Bar. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. 6 On the View Control Bar. 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. under Floor Plans.rvt. 7 In the Project Browser. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. under Sheets (all). You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .Furniture Plan Level 1. click Modify. and select 1:20. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click to place the view. 8 In the Project Browser.

11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. The changes made to the lamp.6 Select one of the furniture components. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. and press ENTER. click Modify. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. chair. enter 5200 mm. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . 10 On the Window menu. select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. The desk. furniture. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets.

and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. click Callout. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. m_Drawing_Exercise. you learn how to create new elevation. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.rvt. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag. callout.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. and select the dashed callout view border. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Views dialog box. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. click Add View. select A0 Metric.6 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. Change the callout view scale. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.Unnamed. click Modify. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. A103 . position the view. and click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. and select 1:20. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. click the scale value. and click Add View to Sheet. click Sheet. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. and click to place the view. The new sheet.

click Elevation. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. double-click Level 1 Furniture.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Modify. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. and click to place the elevation symbol. 18 On the Design Bar. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. Create a new elevation view. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. As you move the cursor. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. center it in the room so that it points north. select the elevation symbol arrow.

23 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A103 . click Add View. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 .a. expand Elevations. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 . select Elevation: Elevation 1 . Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration. 24 In the Views dialog box. 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all).Unnamed. 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet.a and Elevation 1 .19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. and click Add View to Sheet.c. 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol.

and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol. 28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room. 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building. double-click Level 1 Furniture.Furniture Plan Level 1. under Sheets (all).26 Add Elevation 1 . 27 In the Project Browser. 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . double-click A102 . Create a section view.c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet.

31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. click Section. 32 In the Options Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 . select 1:50 for Scale.

By completing the exercises in this lesson. and click OK. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 37 In the Views dialog box. modify the building model from your sheets. 44 If you want to save your changes. 39 Right-click on the view.Unnamed. 42 Right-click on the view.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). and sections. on the File menu. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. and save the exercise file with a unique name. such as callouts. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Custom for View Scale. 38 Right-click on the viewport. click Save As. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. and click Activate View. add views to your sheets. double-click A103 . under Graphics. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. click Add View. 45 Close the exercise file. and click View Properties. select Section: Section 1. 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and to create new views of your building model. The drawing sheet is now complete. 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. elevations.

click the Training Files icon. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. On construction documents. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Open m_Legends. and click OK. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. doors. On construction documents. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule.Filled Level Head . click New ➤ Legend. door frame schedule.Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. and so on). and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. expand Legends. and door frames. Finally. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 2 In the Project Browser. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. windows. and click Rename. click Symbol. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. enter Symbol Legend for Name.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls.

enter 3mm for Name. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. click Modify to end the command. expand Sheets (all).Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 18 On the Design Bar. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. click Edit/New. 12 Under Text. you create a text type with the necessary size. 17 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options bar.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. select Text : 6mm. and click OK twice. click Text. and click to place it. enter 3mm for Text Size. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. On the Design Bar. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. and click OK. 15 Working from the top down. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and double-click A100 . 8 In the Type Selector. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. click Symbol Legend.

21 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Legends. 3 Right-click Legend 1. click New ➤ Legend. m_Legends_in progress. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.rvt. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise. Creating a Wall Type Legend. 19 On the File menu. name the file m_Legends_in progress.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Save. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. enter Wall Type Legend for Name. 7 Select Section for View. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . Using Legends | 335 .Brick on CMU for Family. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. click Save As. click Legend Component. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior . and click Rename. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall.

and click Modify on the Design Bar. 12 On the Options bar.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. click Text. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. click to add a single-segment leader. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component. 11 In the Type Selector. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB.

Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. click Modify to end the command. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2. 28 On the Design Bar. click Wall Type Legend. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. 29 On the File menu. 19 On the Options Bar. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. click to add text without a leader. click Detail Lines. 27 In the Project Browser. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. 26 In the Project Browser.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. select Text : 6mm. add an identical detail line below the lower component. 23 In the Type Selector. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. drag it onto the sheet. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. and enter Wall Type 1. select Medium Lines. 22 On the Design Bar. and click to place it above the symbol legend. Using Legends | 337 . Using a Legend View to Match Types. double-click A100 .

select Medium for Detail Level. click Tile. 5 In the floor plan view. select the wall type 1 component. The open drawings are both visible. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. 8 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the Window menu. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. m_Legends_in_progress. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region.rvt. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. click .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. Using the table. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. If you select By Sheet. When Issued is selected. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. click Open. yet as concise as possible. 4 Click on the value for Description. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Using Revision Tracking | 339 . click the Training Files icon. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. Open m_Revisions. When you use this option. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. the revision is locked and issued to the field. or changes in building material availability. if the active revision is number 1. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. These changes can be due to owner requests. 9 On the File menu. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. and enter a date. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. contractor inquiries. click Revisions. Using Revision Tracking. You can create a sequence of revisions. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. In general. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. For example.

you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.rvt. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. m_Revisions-in progress. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 7 Click OK. enter 1200 mm. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. you make changes to the project floor plan. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. and press ENTER. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . In most instances. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. and click Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area.rvt. select the window. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. expand Views. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Sketching Revision Clouds. Revision clouds have read-only properties. and expand Floor Plans. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views.If Visible is not selected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Save As. 3 In the small empty room. including revision number and revision date. 8 On the File menu.

Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Tagging Revision Clouds. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. 11 In the drawing area. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. on the Edit toolbar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. m_Revisions-in progress. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . click Revision Cloud. 8 Click to place the second window. 9 On the Design Bar. click Save. 15 On the File menu. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click near the windows you have changed. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. you load a revision tag into the project. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt.

6 In the Tags. click OK. 4 Click Load. 3 In the Tags dialog box. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. click Save. and click Open.rfa. You then issue a revision. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. Because you chose to number by project. 9 Click to place the tag. 4 In the drawing area. you create additional revisions in the revision table. you create a sheet view in your project. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Working with Revisions In this exercise. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . dialog box. clear Leader.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. In the Tags dialog box. and because the revision is the first in the project. verify that A0 Metric is selected.rvt. 5 In the Open dialog box. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 10 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. click New ➤ Sheet. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 8 In the drawing area. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Tag. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. A new sheet view is created in the project. and click OK. under Floor Plans. on which you place a revised view. and drag it onto the sheet view. click to place the floor plan. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Working with Revisions. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Tags. select Level 1. the cloud is tagged as number 1. m_Revisions-in progress. you need to add one. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds.

You can continue to add revisions. 9 Select Issued. You do this by issuing the revision. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 14 Click OK. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. 15 On the File menu. click Close. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . and click OK. click Revisions. On the Settings menu. you prevent further changes to the revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. click Revisions. under Add.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. you can no longer modify it. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. On the Settings menu. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. clear Visible for each issued revision. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. click New. enter a name for Issued to.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

Detailing 12 In this tutorial. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. These components scale with the building model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building. In this tutorial. and metal studs. 345 . plywood. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model.

expand Views (all). click the Training Files icon. In order to detail from the building model. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project.rvt located in the Metric folder. In the callout view. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. add detail components. Open m_Cape_House.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. click Open. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. expand Floor Plans. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you detail the foundation sill of a small house. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. and double-click First Floor. you trace over the building model geometry. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. The callout defines the extents of the callout view.

3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 .2 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the section line. 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration. Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line.

click Modify. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and select the callout border. Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. and click the tab in the context menu. click Callout. click Modify. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 8 On the Options Bar. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:5 for Scale. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. right-click in the Design Bar.

click Modify and double-click the callout head. select the First Floor level line. The callout view is displayed. 15 Click OK. 16 In the view.Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. click View Properties. 13 On the View menu. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name. Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.

rvt. Exact dimensions are not important. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. as well as detail lines. and insulation objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. select Wide Lines. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Detailing the View In this exercise. They are also view specific. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. you detail the view of the foundation sill. click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar. select Chain and click . which means that any detail components. click Filled Region. and an anchor bolt. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.17 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. 4 On the Options Bar. siding. 3 In the Type Selector. sub-flooring. Detailing the View. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. region objects. m_Cape_House.

12 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. 13 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . 10 In the Type Properties dialog box.6 On the Design Bar. the pattern does not display. If you are zoomed in too far. 14 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. select EARTH. click Region Properties. enter Earth for Name. under Name and Pattern. 15 On the Design Bar. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. select <Invisible lines>. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box.

select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open. click Detail Component. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 17 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Selector.Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. 22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. click . select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section. 18 In the Open dialog box.rfa. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber.

24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration. 25 In the Type Selector. select M_Dimension Lumber.Section: 38x140. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 . and place it in the detail view.

click Detail Component. Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. select M_Plywood : 25mm.Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration. 27 In the Type Selector.

37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. Select Inside. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. enter 19 mm for Thickness. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. enter Lap Siding for Name. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. and click OK.30 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. and click OK. 38 In the Name dialog box. click . . and click to place the lap siding. When you place the repeating detail component. click Modify. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. 33 In the Type Selector. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. click Repeating Detail. and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. 35 On the Options Bar. select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration.

meaning they display only in this view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. 2 In the Type Selector.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Lines. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. click Wide Lines. Adding Detail Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. on the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . m_Cape_House.rvt. Like detail components. you add lines to your detail. they are view specific. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it.

13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration. select Chain. click View Properties. click Detail Lines. select .4 On the View menu. select Medium Lines. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 . 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Filled Region. select Medium lines. and click . select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter.

21 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. 20 Click OK three times. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and click OK. click Region Properties.14 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 17 In the Name dialog box. under Name and Pattern. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. select Gypsum-Plaster. enter Plasterboard for Name. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box.

select Concrete. select . click New. the region would be blank. and click OK. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. m_Cape_House. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. 29 In the Name dialog box. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. enter Concrete for Name. 32 Click OK three times. click Filled Region. 33 On the Design Bar. under Name and Pattern. 26 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . click Line Styles. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. you turn off the display of the model geometry. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. Near the end of this lesson. under Modify Subcategories. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Region Properties. 24 On the Options Bar. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation.rvt. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Selector. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. click Duplicate. select Medium Lines. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls.

click and enter 28mm for Offset. click Insulation. Adding Break Lines. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center.4 Under Lines Styles. click Detail Lines. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. 7 In the Type Selector. Adding Break Lines In this exercise. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. you add break lines to the detail. select Vapor Barrier. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. Select Black for Line Color. Select Dash for Line Pattern. 8 On the Options Bar.

Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Modify. m_Cape_House. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 . 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration. 2 In the Type Selector. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image.rvt. Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line. 7 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify that M_Break Line is selected.

the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 10 On the Tools toolbar. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. When you turn the display model off. as shown in the following illustration. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration.9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Do not display for Display model. and select the break line.

m_Cape_House. Click again to set the location of the text box. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader. click Save As.rvt. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Text. 2 On the Type Selector.13 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 If you want to save your changes. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes. click to create a leader with two segments. select 4 mm text for Text size. on the File menu. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Enter the text. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . you add text notes to complete the detail.

Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. expand Views (all). Within a detail view. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. and double-click Basement. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. such as walls and windows. Open c_Office_Building.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. expand Floor Plans. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. click Open.rvt located in the Common folder. display in coarse detail. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. while other model elements. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click the Training Files icon. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. For example. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views.

click . The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 .Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. 4 With the sink selected. click . behind the cabinet. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. and when it highlights. on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. select it.

c_Office_Building. and overriding detail level settings. 3 On the View menu. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 2 On the Window menu. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. a cabinet. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. double-click Level 1. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Tile. and a simple fill pattern.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. using halftone. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles.

and click Apply. The door tags are not displayed. scroll down to Furniture. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. select Visibility/Graphics. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . 12 On the View menu. and select Halftone. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 13 On the View menu.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. click the Model Categories tab. 10 Click OK. select Visibility/Graphics. 7 On the View menu. and double-click Level 1. click the Annotation Categories tab. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. 9 Under Visibility. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all).

click the Model Categories tab. 21 Click OK twice. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. 18 For Walls. select Coarse for Detail Level. Select 8 for Line Weight. Select Black for Line Color. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Select Solid for Line Pattern. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. and click Apply. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box.

Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. on the File menu. named Door Detail.rvt located in the Metric folder. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. click Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The new drafting view. you learn how to create a drafted detail. 4 In the Project Browser.22 If you want to save your changes. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. Open m_Drafting_views. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. 5 Proceed to the next exercise. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. click New ➤ Drafting View. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. Select 1:5 for Scale. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . click Save As. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and expand Drafting Views. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. In the next exercise. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. is displayed in the Project Browser. After you create a drafting view. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

4 On the Design Bar. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . When the dimension value displays in blue. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch. 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. 2 In the Type Selector. m_Drafting_views. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you can change it. select Wide Lines. click Dimension.rvt. click Detail Lines. After you create a dimension. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. and click the tab in the context menu.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. right-click in the Design Bar.

18 On the Design Bar. verify Drafting is selected. Under Dimension Snaps. click Detail Lines. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Sand.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 17 Under Pattern Type. and click OK 3 times. click Filled Region. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. click . 11 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. clear Length dimension snap increments. On the Design Bar. 14 In the Name dialog box. click Lines. click Snaps. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. click Duplicate. enter Sand. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Wide Lines. click Edit/New. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Name. 20 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu.

24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension. click Dimension.22 On the Design Bar. 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and add 2 dimensions to the door trim.

click Detail Lines. click Duplicate.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. 34 In the Name dialog box. 27 In the Type Selector. Select the desired dimensions. and on the View Control Bar. click Detail Component. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 In the Type Selector. enter 38 x 125. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. select Medium Lines. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. click . and click OK twice. and click Hide Object from the context menu. click the Hide/Isolate command.

click Detail Component. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element. 41 Add two break lines as shown. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Type Selector. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing .38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. select Break Line.

43 In the Options Bar. 50 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . and click OK. 48 Select Door Detail. click Text. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Sheet. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and drag it onto the sheet. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. and expand Drafting Views. verify that A0 metric is selected. click to create a leader with two segments. 47 In the Project Browser. expand Views.

5 In the Import/Link dialog box. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. The detail that you import is in DWG format. and then click Open. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. select Preserve colors. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. 7 On the View menu. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. you must explode it. After you explode it. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. under Layer/Level Colors. DXF. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. select New ➤ Drafting View. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. m_Drafting_views.rvt. Enter 5 for the Scale value.51 Proceed to the next exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. In order to modify it. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. select m_Rail_detail. DGN. Select Custom for Scale. 3 Click OK. The detail is imported as an import symbol.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files.

and click Full Explode.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. 10 If an error dialog box displays. 15 In the Color dialog box. Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . and click OK 3 times. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. click Modify. press and hold CTRL. click Delete Element(s). click . 12 On the Options Bar. 9 Right-click. click Edit/New. The text retains the DWG layer color. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. select black. and then select the detail. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. and select all of the text blocks in the detail.

378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Modify. A leader is added to the text note. MET STUD FRAMING. click . 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown.Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown. and select the bottom text note. Creating a Reference Callout.

it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 6 Select the callout. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). expand Views (all). NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. m_Drafting_views. Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. and double-click Section 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . The section view is displayed.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. and double-click the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections. click Modify. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. select Reference other view.

Otherwise. on the File menu. close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing .8 If you want to save your changes.

381 . you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects.Scheduling 13 In this tutorial.

382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . When you schedule building components in Revit Building. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. you can list each component as a separate line item. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. creating an instance schedule. You begin by creating an instance schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. creating a type schedule. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item.

Open m_Schedules. and click View. and click OK.Next. 7 Click OK. select Windows. under Category. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. click Open. Finally. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 4 Under Available fields. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select Comments and click Add. click the Fields tab. 5 Using the same process. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. right-click in the Design Bar. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

under Other. The window schedule is displayed. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click View Properties. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. However. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. click Show. on the Options Bar. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. sorted by type mark. 16 Click OK twice. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Close. 11 In the Project Browser. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . in large building models with many views. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. this can be a time-consuming process. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. NOTE By clicking Show.

20 Click OK twice. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. 22 Close the exercise file. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. 21 If you want to save your changes. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 . click Save As. and click View Properties. clear Itemize every instance. The window type schedule is displayed.Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. on the File menu.

386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Floor Plans. select Number and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box. and click OK. expand Views (all). and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. click Open. under Category. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. select Rooms. Open m_Schedules. click the Training Files icon. and click View. click Schedule/Quantities.

8 Click the Appearance tab. The room Number is 1. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. because the room is not tagged with a room tag. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. click New. next to Rows:. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. Next.6 Using the same process. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. you define the font for the schedule headers. 9 To the right of Header text. 10 Click OK.

12 Using the same process. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click flr 3. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. and enter Conference to change the room name. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. and select Conference from the list. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. and enter 30. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. None of the rooms have tags placed on them. add a second room.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 . select 30 Conference for Room. and click Drafting. click Room Tag. expand Schedules/Quantities.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. 23 In the Project Browser. and click to place the room tag. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. and verify that Horizontal is selected. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. select 29 Conference for Room.

double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 28 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag. select Auto for Room.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click flr 3. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration. 26 On the Options Bar.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . and zoom in on the room.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. click . 30 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. and click OK. click . under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. 34 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. select Services for Name. click Modify. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. and select Circulation for Name. 35 With the room tags selected. and click OK. double-click flr 3. locate the room with an area of 92. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. 32 With the room tags selected. 31 On the Design Bar.11 square meters. click Modify. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room. select Office for Name. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration.

press and hold CTRL. 39 Select Schedule keys. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. under Category. 45 On the Options Bar. click New to add a row to the schedule. and enter Std Office. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. click the Key Name field. 44 Using the same process. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and Wall Finish. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Floor Finish. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Base Finish. under Available fields. 43 In the new row. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. and click Add. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Rooms. Enter Paint for Wall Finish.

52 On the Options Bar. select Exec Offices for Room Style. click . 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 56 Under Other. under Other. 51 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click View Properties. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. click Modify. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. 55 On the View menu. 48 On the Design Bar. select Exec Offices for Room Style. under Other. and click Add. 49 On the Options Bar. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. press and hold CTRL. click Edit for Fields. under Available fields. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 38. and click OK. double-click Room Schedule. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . under Schedules/Quantities. double-click flr 3. select Room Style. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 .

select Services from the list in the Room Style column. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Creating a Room Color Diagram.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. click PANTONE. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. and double-click flr 3.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Color Fill. click OK. click Modify. 9 In the Color dialog box. 7 On the Options Bar. click the color button for Conference. 5 In the alert dialog box. expand Floor Plans. 11 Click OK three times. and click the color green. 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. under Views (all). and select the color legend. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Edit Color Scheme. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. m_schedules. scroll all the way to the left.

Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Close the exercise file. 15 If you want to save your changes. double-click Room Schedule. graphics are displayed with imperial values. under Schedules/Quantities. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click the Training Files icon. click Open. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. on the File menu. and click View. To display graphics with metric values. click Schedule/Quantities. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. and level. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. double-click flr 3. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. click Save As. select Walls. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. number. and click OK. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 4 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.rvt located in the Common folder. Open c_Schedules_2. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Categories. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 13 In the Room Schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson.

Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule. click Edit for Fields. under Other. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created. 10 Click OK twice. expand Schedules/Quantities.

Partitions. expand C10 . 13 Click OK. 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. and double-click Level 1.Interiors.Interior Construction.Brick Veneer w/ Stud. and select C1010115 . 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type.Partitions . and then click in the schedule. expand Floor Plans. expand C1010 . and click . under Views (all). All of the walls of this wall type are updated. 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. expand C . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser. expand C1010100 .Fixed Partitions.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . 17 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. double-click Furniture Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. click in the Assembly Code field. expand C1010100. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. expand C. and select C1010145 . expand C1010. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. double-click Wall Schedule. and then click . click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls.Partitions . expand C10. 22 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities.16 Select one of the Interior . click Edit/New.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 21 Click OK three times.

click Edit for Fields. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. and click Properties. select Room for Select available fields from. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. and click to place it.24 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click Furniture Schedule. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Sheet. Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. under Other. 29 Click OK twice. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

37 If you want to save your changes. you create a multi-category schedule. regardless of category. 38 Close the exercise file. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . adding the shared parameters to a family.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. click Save As. and creating a multi-category schedule. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. These shared parameters can be added to any family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. and are defined and stored in an external file. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned.

7 Under Parameters. click New. enter a file name. select Text for Type. click OK. click Create. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. add them to a door family. click Shared Parameters. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . enter Closure for Name. 10 After you add the parameters. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. click New. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. under Groups. and Lock Set. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. and then generate the multi-category schedule. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. If you are working on a network. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. and click Save. and assign Text for Type.You create shared parameters. ID. Hinge. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. and click OK. 3 In the Save As dialog box. and click OK. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. enter Hardware. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 9 Add three additional parameters. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu.

16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. under Parameters. click Close to close the file. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click Select. setting them as Type parameters. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. click Family Types. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. 21 Click OK. and click OK. click Add. under Parameters. so that you can use it later in this exercise.rfa located in the Common folder. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 13 Open c_ Door. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. 23 On the File menu. Enter N/A for Closure. Enter Chrome for Hinge. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. click Open. select Instance. select Shared parameter. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. select ID. Enter 1 for ID. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. You are now working in the Family Editor. click the Training Files icon. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 .

38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. 39 On the File menu. 35 On the Design Bar. select ID. and click OK twice.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. click Lines. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Add.rvt located in the Common folder. 31 Under Parameters. 33 Click OK.. select c_Hardware_Plan. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. click Close to close the file. and click Open. and click Open. select Hardware. click Select. click . 41 In the Open dialog box. under Parameter Group. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. 36 On the Options Bar. 25 In the New dialog box.rft in the Annotations folder. ID).e. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Open. click Label. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. 26 On Design Bar. select Filter parameter. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . as shown. the tag cannot attach to any component. select Multi-Category Tag.

48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Multi-Category from the list. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa and NewDoor. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window. 47 Click to place the tag. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Tag. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. 45 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities.rfa that you just created. 53 Click OK. select Multi-Category Tags for Category. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family.42 On the File menu. and click OK. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields.

you create a level based door schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. click Open.The multi-category schedule is displayed. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. expand Floor Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. based on wall area. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 .M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).rvt located in the Metric folder. The floor plan is displayed. on the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. However.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. click Save As. 54 If you want to save your changes. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. and double-click Level 3. You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule. click the Training Files icon. you create two schedules.

and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 4 Click OK. Under Name. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. 11 Under Field formatting. click the Fields tab. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 Under Fields. select the following fields. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. Select equals in the second menu. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. 15 Click OK twice. Select Level 3 in the third menu. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. under Other. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. 6 Under Available fields.Level 3. enter Doors . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Hidden Field. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. select Level. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3. select Doors. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. 12 Right-click the schedule. click Edit for Filter. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . and click OK. and select (none) for Filter. and click View Properties. click the Filter tab.

enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. Verify Schedule building components is selected. m to more accurately represent the data. 12 Under Fields. click the Fields tab. 11 Under Heading. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and then under Field Formatting. select Walls. 9 Click the Formatting tab. The schedule is displayed. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. m_First_Project-West_Wing. 13 Click OK. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. enter Cost/Sq. 5 Under Available fields. 10 Under Fields. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row.rvt. select Cost. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. Use the cost values in the following illustration. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. 3 Click OK. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.16 On the Standard toolbar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. select Area.

Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. They cannot be shared with other projects and. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. 28 If you want to save your changes. 23 Click Field Format. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. under Other. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 25 Click OK. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. click Calculated Value. Select Fixed for Units. 24 In the Format dialog box. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. without the value it would have a unit of area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. and click OK twice. unlike shared parameters. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. Verify that Number is selected for Type. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 20 Click the Formatting tab. The schedule is displayed. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 Close the exercise file. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 19 Click OK. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. 22 Under Field formatting. m column. select Total Cost. you cannot use them to tag objects. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. click Save As. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. click Edit for Fields. and click View Properties. you learn how to schedule project parameters. 21 Under Fields.

Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. Occupant. Enter Occupant for Name. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. click Room Tag. 4 Click OK.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. and click Drafting. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Open m_Office_2. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. 5 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. right-click in the Design Bar. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Project Parameters. either by entering it directly. After you create the schedule. click Add to create the new parameter. Under Categories. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

click the Fields tab. 15 Close the exercise file. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . 14 If you want to save your changes. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 11 Under Available fields. under Categories. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule. select the following fields. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. on the File menu. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. select Rooms to create a room schedule. and click OK. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box.

instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type.rvt located in the Common folder. click Open. 8 In the New Database dialog box. 6 Click Finish. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. under Database. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. in addition to the Id column. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. click the Training Files icon. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule.mdb for Database Name. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . enter Revit_Project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open c_Schedules_2. Additionally. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. and click Next. 1 On the File menu. 13 Close the exercise file. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. click Create. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click OK in the dialog box. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). under Database Name. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. click OK. For example. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. 3 Click New. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. 9 Under Directories. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. and open the database in Microsoft Access. select a location for the database file. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. 10 When the confirmation displays. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. click the File Data Source tab. and click Next. and click OK to create the database.

and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial. 413 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

For example. click the Training Files icon. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Elevations. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. expand Views (all). and double-click South. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. and not 1504 m. click Open. Level 1 reads 1500 m. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. while Level 2 reads 4 m. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. Open m_simple_house. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. and not 4 m. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. For example.

4 In the Element Properties dialog box. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. If you did that now. and press ENTER. 12 On the View menu. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box.Shared. click Edit/New. 8 Click OK twice. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. and you must create a new level type. Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog box.Shared. select Shared for Elevation Base. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. The south elevation is displayed. 10 Select the Level 1 line. under Constraints.2 Select the Level 1 line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. 14 In the Type Selector. By entering 10000 mm in this step. and click OK. you specify the new location of the project. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. enter 10000 mm. enter Level . select Level : Level . only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. By selecting the Level 1 line. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 3 On the Options Bar. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. However. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. 13 Select the Level 2 line.

under Elevations. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In this case. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. 17 If you want to save your changes. define the roof level as shared. click Save As. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. as well as other views of the building model. double-click North. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. permanent dimensions are created automatically. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . except when you sketch profiles to create families. Dimensioning In this lesson. In Revit Building.15 In the Project Browser. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. 16 Using the same method.

Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. and angular dimensions. By default. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. Dimensioning | 417 . Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. select it. click Open. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. linear. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. that you can add to your drawings. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. Open m_Dimensions. select it. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. multi-segmented. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. radial.rvt located in the Metric folder. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. and click to place the dimension. outside of the wall. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. The dimension displays in the drawing. and click to set the location of the dimension.5 Move the cursor to the left. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. indicating that the dimension can be modified. In addition. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. click Dimension. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. 6 Click the lock. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. The lock displays as locked.

Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension. indicating that the segments are now equal. click Dimension. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other. Dimensioning | 419 .9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. and click to place the dimension. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . 11 On the Options Bar. The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol.

and zoom in around the curved wall. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. 14 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 15 On the Design Bar. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. the default dimension option. 16 On the Options Bar.13 On the View menu. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. click Modify. and press DELETE. Select the inside face of the wall.

Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc. and click to place the dimension. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. Move your cursor to the right. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. and click to place the dimension. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. click . and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. as shown in the following illustration. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. Dimensioning | 421 .

but do not select anything.23 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. For example. click Modify. in some cases.rvt. select it. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. However. including the wall centerline. a different wall selection choice highlights. delete. m_Dimensions. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. for a multi-segmented dimension. Controlling Witness Line Location. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Each time you press TAB. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn to add. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and press TAB repeatedly. When you place dimensions. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. click Dimension. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall.

7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. click Modify. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. and select it. Dimensioning | 423 . 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face. 9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line.

14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. 13 Click the control box again. The witness line moves to the wall centerline.12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. The witness line moves to the inside wall face. but do not select it. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

If you right-click the control box. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. m_Dimensions. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.15 Right-click the control box. The witness line is deleted. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. The full dimension string is displayed again. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties. Dimensioning | 425 . Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. and click Delete Witness Line. 18 To end the editing command. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines.

then Up for Read Convention. click Edit/New. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. a lock symbol immediately displays. Working with Alignments and Constraints. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. 7 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Modify.2 On the Options Bar. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. on the File menu. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. select Right. As you create components. click . Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. if two or more walls are colinear. click Save As. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. 6 On the Design Bar. Under Text. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. For example. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. when sketching walls. 5 Click OK twice. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box.

indicating that the Align command is active. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_Alignment. click . Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. Dimensioning | 427 . 5 On the Options Bar. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. When you align two components. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. click Open. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. The symbol changes to a closed lock. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. 3 Click the lock. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. select Multiple Alignment.

The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. click Modify. 11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward.7 Select the short wall to the left. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked). 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

12 On the toolbar. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. Dimensioning | 429 . click . the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. 13 Click the right wall. select Multiple Alignment. 15 On the Options bar. click once to undo the move. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar. Move the walls to verify the alignment. NOTE Because you are not aligning walls. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model.

20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. 21 On the Design Bar. Door 3 aligns with Door 4. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. 22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4.17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify and select one of the aligned doors.

29 To view the constraint. clear Multiple Alignment. click Modify. click . on the Design Bar. Dimensioning | 431 .28 to align the windows. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. 31 On the Tools toolbar. A lock is displayed. 24 On the Options Bar. click and repeat steps 27 . 28 Select the far right window in the top wall. 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. The two windows align. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall.Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. indicating the constraint. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise.rvt. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. m_Alignment. as shown in the following illustration. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .32 Align the remaining windows. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall.

Select Entire Walls for Pick. the windows). and save the exercise file with a unique name. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. select Openings. Dimensioning | 433 . 5 Click OK. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . indicating the start and end of the dimension string. click Save As. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. The two vertical walls highlight. on the File menu. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. 8 If you want to save your changes. Click Options. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 3 On the Options Bar.2 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and then Widths.

You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. click . you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . tag doors and windows. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open c_Area. click the Training Files icon. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. click Dimension.rvt located in the Common folder. expand Views (all). 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. and double-click Level 1.Annotating In this lesson. sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. rotate tags with building components.

rvt. click Room Tag. Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. Sequentially Tagging Rooms. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. c_Area. Annotating | 435 . you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and click to place the room tag.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. 6 Proceed to the next exercise.

enter 101.4 On the Design Bar. 7 Continue to place room tags. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. Click to place the new tag. Sequential letters are also supported. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Room tag. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. and press ENTER. indicating that it can be edited. and select the room tag. click Modify. click it. The room tag number displays in blue. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 5 Zoom in on the tag number.

and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and clear Leader. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. c_Area. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag.8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Door. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. to add a tag with a leader. 2 In the Type Selector. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan.rvt. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Annotating | 437 . 3 On the Options Bar. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. click Door. verify that Tag on placement is selected. Tagging Doors and Windows. as shown in the following illustration. you learn how to place door and window tags. and select Leader. 6 On the Options Bar.

click Door. click Tag All Not Tagged. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. 13 Under Leader. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. and click OK. All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Leader. select Create. and then click OK. 10 Place the door below Door 6. clear Create. Notice that the door is placed without a tag. select Window Tags. under Category. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Tag on placement. click Tag All Not Tagged. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar.

17 If you want to save your changes. Annotating | 439 . on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

More specifically.Viewing 15 In this tutorial. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. 441 . how to control fill pattern colors. you learn to create and customize views of building information models.

Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. sections. Open m_Viewing_Exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. locate the Project Browser. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. click Open. 2 In the Project Browser. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar.rvt located in the Metric folder. including elevation and three-dimensional views. and double-click East. expand Elevations. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. and three-dimensional (3D) views. on the Standard toolbar.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. click . 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. expand Views (all). Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. you learn how to access different views of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You create elevations. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area.

This change is applied only to the active view. click Model Graphics Style. This change is applied only in this elevation view. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. scroll down and clear Window Tags. click Visibility/Graphics. click . Viewing a Building Model | 443 . 7 Under Visibility. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. 8 Click OK. and click Hidden Line.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Annotation Categories tab. The default name of the view is {3D}. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. the east elevation. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box.

and click OK. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. and expand 3D Views. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser. zoom. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. You can pan. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. and click Rename. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click X to close the view. 13 Press and hold CTRL. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. . NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. The view follows the movement of the cursor. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. enter My 3D View. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. . click to reorient the view. expand Views (all). under 3D Views. double-click My 3D View.10 On the View toolbar. right-click {3D}.

eye height. and distance from the target. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. After you specify the second point (the view target). right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views (all).Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. Cameras define the eye point. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Viewing a Building Model | 445 . 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. click Camera. as shown in the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. outside of the dimension lines. and click View. m_Viewing_Exercise.

9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. 5 On the View menu. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. down. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click Dynamically Modify View. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. Press and hold the left mouse button. and sideways to see how the view changes. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. Press and hold the left mouse button. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. Move the cursor up. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view.

height. Viewing a Building Model | 447 . Press and hold the left mouse button.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Change the camera position. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. 13 On the View menu. click Tile. and target 12 On the Window menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

under Floor Plans. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 16 Right-click. click 3D View 1. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). and click Show Camera. double-click Level 1. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser. and move it to another location. 17 In My 3D View.14 In the Project Browser. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights.

right-click. In the Element Properties dialog box. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. Viewing a Building Model | 449 . Click OK. click Model Graphics Style.3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. click to create a new 3D view. and click Properties. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. under Camera. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. and click Shading. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. 20 On the View Control Bar. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Extents. select Section Box. A rotation tool is also displayed. 24 Click the section box. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. and click OK. A section box is displayed around the model. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click View Properties.22 On the View menu. as shown in the following illustration.

rvt. m_Viewing_Exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. and maximize this view. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 451 . Creating a Section View In this exercise. expand Floor Plans.

3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. 6 Select the section view. right-click. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. or in the Project Browser. 8 Select the section line. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. and double-click Section 1.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1). and click Open View. View the section 5 To view the section. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . double-click the section head. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. click Modify. and click Find Referring Views. click Section.

m_Viewing_Exercise. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 14 On the Design Bar. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. Creating Elevation Views. Notice the change in section depth. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. click Modify. double-click Level 1. click Elevation. double-click Level 1. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. Notice the change in the view direction. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Modify. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view.9 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the section line.

Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. double-click Level 1.a by default. Do not select the arrow. and click.b. 5 On the Design Bar. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. 10 In the Project Browser. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create.a. double-click the elevation symbol arrow.b. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. under Floor Plans. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors.3 Without clicking in the drawing area. Elevation 1 . The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. click Modify. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing . Elevation 1 . View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. double-click Elevation 1 . The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 7 In the Project Browser. move the cursor around the building model. under Elevations.

you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. roofs. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. such as Brick on CMU. in this case. and other families. where each layer is assigned a different material. In addition. such as the one below. in a compound wall. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. click Save As. a shade of gray.11 If you want to save your changes. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. For example. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. floors. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. This includes walls. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. and applies to phasing override materials as well. and the insulation color to pink. on the File menu. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types.

expand Sections (Section Head . click Color. 4 Under Cut Pattern.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The surface pattern of the brick is black. and double-click 3D. click Open. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. Open c_Showroom.Filled). The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views. expand 3D Views. 2 On the Settings menu. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Color dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click OK twice.Level 3. expand Views (all). Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. select red.Brick for Name. 3 In the Materials dialog box. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. select Masonry . click Materials. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder.

Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. 9 In the Materials dialog box. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. click Color. select Masonry . and click OK twice. click Materials. 11 In the Color dialog box. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.rvt. expand Views (all). View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser.Brick for Name. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. select white. and double-click Level 1. 10 Under Surface Pattern. c_Showroom. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 .

Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. including the current view. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. under Graphics. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 10 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. right-click. 12 If you want to save your changes. under Graphics. and click OK.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. and click . select Solid fill. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. select a shade of gray. click Edit/New. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. and click OK three times. 5 In the Color dialog box. on the File menu. and click Fine. double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Detail Level. and click Properties. By default. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. If you create more than one plan region in a file. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. line color. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. line type. refer to the online Help for more information. although they may have coincident edges. and you cannot control their visibility. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. or pattern. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view.

the south elevation is also displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. expand Views (all). click Open. In the following illustration. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Open m_Plan_Region. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.rvt located in the Metric folder. and click View. click Plan Region.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1.

and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. and the view depth plane. click . click Lines. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. 3 In the Level 1 view. under Extents. You use the view range property to control cut plane.Plan regions have a single property. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. and then click OK twice. click Edit for View Range. click Modify. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. the top and bottom clip planes. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. Press ESC to end the command. click Finish Sketch. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 7 In the View Range dialog box. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. By selecting Parent View’s Level. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. and click Properties. 9 Click Apply. that is similar to the view range for plan views. 5 Select the red dashed line. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. The plan region is no longer visible. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. top and bottom clip planes. right-click. As the cursor moves across it. view range.

click Save As. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 If you want to save your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. on the File menu. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and save the exercise file with a unique name.

billboards.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views. to place and render decals to create signs. 463 . you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and posters. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model.

define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. In this exercise. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. After you create the perspective view. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. When you complete these changes. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. you select a scene that defines the model environment. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. the floor.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson.

Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . under Construction. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . click Open.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. verify that Co-house . right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click the tab in the context menu. Open m_Cohouse.Cavity Wall . 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. and click Edit/New. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit for Structure. click Wall. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. click . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Brick.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type.rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon.

click Duplicate. 18 In the Materials dialog box.Asphalt. select Polished. 9 Under AccuRender. under Name. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. 12 Click OK twice. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click .Running.200mm. click Materials. click Modify. click Materials. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 8 In the Materials dialog box. enter Aluminum. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 26 Click OK twice. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. click Edit for Structure. click Edit/New. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click next to Texture to display the Material Library.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu.Plain. under _accurender. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. and click Aluminum. 24 In the Material Library. expand Masonry and click Brick. under _accurender. under Name. for Layer 2. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 23 Under AccuRender. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. under Construction. select Masonry . . When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. 25 Under Name. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 22 In the New Material dialog box. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. under Name. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. Polished and click OK. expand Metals. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 Under Name. 21 In the Materials dialog box. select Carib. 19 Click OK four times. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. 27 On the Design Bar. select the curtain wall mullion again.Brick. select Site .

37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. verify that New is selected. Polished. The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. floor. click No. under Materials and Finishes. floor. 33 Click OK three times.29 On the Options Bar. . and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. click in the Material field. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. under Name. producing a photorealistic effect. click Region Raytrace. click . 35 Move the cursor over the building model. select Aluminum. click Edit/New. select Exterior under Type. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.

when you render an exterior view of the model. Adding Trees to the Site.38 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Cnst. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise.rvt. m_Cohouse. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. you place two different types of trees on the building site. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 1st Flr. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 39 Proceed to the next exercise. In a later exercise.

select M_Tree . 4 In the Type Selector. and click Site. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. right-click in the Design Bar. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.9 Meters. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. click Site Component. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. and click to place a tree.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum .2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model.

15 Under Other. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. as shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Type Selector. under Identity Data. Black. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click display the Plant Library. under Other. select Black Oak for Type Comments. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. select Oak. and place two black oak trees. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. select any of the deciduous trees. and click Deciduous. 13 Under Name.Create a new type of tree. click Modify. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 12 In the Plant Library. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating a Perspective View. enter Black Oak. click in the Value field for Plant Name. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Site Component. under accurender. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. click Duplicate. m_Cohouse. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. to . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. and click OK twice. expand Trees and Shrubs. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. click Edit/New.

view open. click Camera.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Cnst. The new perspective view is displayed. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 . on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.

5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. double-click 1st Flr. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. Cnst.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). view. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

date. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . under 3D Views. double-click Exterior.7 In the Project Browser. and environment settings that you use to render the view. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. and click OK. place. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Rename. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. you select a scene and specify time. right-click 3D View 1. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise.rvt. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. lighting. enter Exterior. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View.

click Settings. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Select By Date.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. 8 Under Time. 7 Under Date. and click Sun. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. under Scene Settings. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. click the Solar Angles tab. Time.

26 On the Design Bar. click . 11 Scroll down. 18 Click Material. 19 In the Material Library. MA. 13 Enter . Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . select Autumn for Plant Season.9 Click the Place tab.) 14 Click OK. Rye. under _accurender. click No. verify that Automatic Sky is selected.20 for Cloudiness. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 10 Click in the Cities list. select Grass. 21 Click OK twice. and click OK. click Raytrace. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 16 In the Environment dialog box. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. select Good for Quality. under Background Color. and enter bo. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. and select Boston. under Scene Settings. USA. 27 On the Options Bar. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. 12 Click the Settings Tab. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. click Environment. under Scene Settings. Dark. and click OK. click Site. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. select Ground Plane. The Ground Plane tab displays. 20 In the Name list.00 (many clouds. 17 Under Advanced. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. click Image Size.

you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. click Capture Rendering. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 30 On the Design Bar. on the File menu. Adding RPC People In this exercise. define the view and render scene settings. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and finally. expand Renderings. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Rendering an Interior View. To create the rendered scene. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. 32 If you want to save this exercise. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.

Cnst. m_Cohouse. 4 In the Type Selector. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. and double-click 2nd Flr.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. expand Floor Plans.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). Rendering an Interior View | 477 .rvt. click Component. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 5 On the Options Bar. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. select Rotate after placement. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.

Creating the Interior Perspective View.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .8 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.

5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.The interior perspective is displayed. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. Rendering an Interior View | 479 . Cnst. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. double-click 2nd Flr. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.

8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click to display the 3D view of the building model. and click OK. under Size. under Extents. right-click 3D View 1.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size. click Modify. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. click View Properties. and click OK. 12 On the View menu. enter Interior. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. A section box is displayed around the building model. Grips are displayed on the section box. and select the section box. 14 On the Design Bar. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. 11 On the View menu. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. enter 178 mm for Height. select Section Box. and click Rename. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. enter 229 mm for Width.

m_Cohouse. place. you create a render scene to specify the time. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and environment settings used to render the view. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. date. By limiting the geometry. Creating a New Render Scene. you reduce the rendering time. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise.rvt.

8 Under Date. and click Save. 18 Under Advanced. USA. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. You can select families with transparent materials. Rye. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. select Grass. on the Main tab. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. as daylight sources. select Interior. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. double-click {3D}. 4 Under Type. 10 Click the Place tab. under Scene Settings. 13 Click the Settings tab. and click Sun. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. such as windows and doors. click Environment. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. under Background Color. select Summer for Plant Season. 19 Click Material. Time. 24 Under Scene Settings. The Ground Plane tab displays. 17 In the Environment dialog box. and click OK. and enter Interior Scene for Name. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. select Ground Plane. 21 In the Name list. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. and select Boston. 7 Select By Date. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Dark. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. m_Cohouse. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. MA. 14 Click Save. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. click Site. under Scene Settings. click Settings. 22 Click OK twice. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 20 In the Material Library. click OK. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.rvt. click the Solar Angles tab. 9 Under Time. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. under Use View’s Section Box.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 12 Scroll down. 11 Click in the Cities list. select {3D}. and enter bo. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. under accurender. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. under 3D Views. select New. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. specify a file location and name for the scene settings.

Curtain Wall 1). click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. click Radiate. click Daylights. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. When radiate completes. click Raytrace. 7 On the Design Bar. double-click Interior. Rendering an Interior View | 483 . . Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. begins. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. The radiosity process. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. which can take several minutes. 8 On the Options Bar. the following rendered view is displayed.

you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. on the File menu. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. In a plan view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. click Save As. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. 10 Close the exercise file. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. The walkthrough path is a spline. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you rendered an exterior and an interior view. but you can also define it in a 3D. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you must select or define a scene. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames.9 If you want to save your changes. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. elevation. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. or section view.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. of the walkthrough. and change unit formats as desired. expand Views (all). and click to specify the start point. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and double-click 1st Floor. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. and ends in the far corner of the living room.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. or the first key frame. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt located in the Common folder. click Open. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Open c_Townhouse. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . proceeds through the dining room. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. If you prefer to use Metric values. click Walkthrough. click the Training Files icon. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and click the tab in the context menu.

and click OK. select the crop boundary. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. If it is not. 11 Under Change. verify Field of view is selected. expand Walkthroughs. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. on the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 12 On the View menu. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click . The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. and select the crop boundary. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 9 On the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.

NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. 17 Click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. enter 1 for Frame. click Edit Walkthrough. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). c_Townhouse. 14 Click . 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise.rvt. proceed to the next exercise. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. The walkthrough plays. 16 On the Options Bar. press ESC. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.13 On the Options Bar.

You can move any camera target or key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 2 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 On the Options Bar. select Path for Controls. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). clear Far Clip Active. under Extents. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. click Edit Walkthrough. click . The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor.

9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 2 In the Save As dialog box. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. click Save As. 9 On the Options Bar. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. and save the exercise file with a unique name. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. or with AccuRender raytracing. Recording the Walkthrough. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. and click OK. to play the walkthrough. c_Townhouse. If you are unsure of what option to use. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. 1 On the File menu. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . 4 Under Format. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. on the File menu. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. select <Shading> for Display mode. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. click Export ➤ AVI. click Edit Walkthrough. When you export the walkthrough. under Walkthroughs. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. specify 10 for Frames per Second. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. specifying the number of frames. double-click Walkthrough 1. 3 Under Output Length. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. and click Save. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. shaded. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. hidden line.7 Click the third key frame position. reducing the size of the image.rvt. shaded with edges. The AVI is recorded. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. and Section Boxes. and details. In this tutorial. there are several options for expressing the architecture. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. For the realistic approach. an outside reviewer. 491 .Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial." In Revit Building. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. a consultant. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. length. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. To express texture beyond material specifics. or the client. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Whether the audience is the general contractor. Using the pre-built building model. you explore the stylistic approach. In this series of exercises. Co-house. the Linework Tool. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. sections. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. type. elevations. Advanced Model Graphics.

click Open. and click Duplicate. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. right-click 2nd Flr. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Cohouse. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Views (all). Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. expand Floor Plans.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson.

and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Down Arrow. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. expand the Stairs category. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. under Floor Plans. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. and clear DOWN Text. 8 Click OK. and click Rename. sections. and click Save. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and so on in this view. Using Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that no annotations display in this view. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Annotation Categories tab. elevations. UP Text. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. this represents the view getting smaller. dimensions. 7 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. Cnst. 10 On the File menu. 11 In the Save As directory. and click OK.rvt. This turns off the visibility of all tags. navigate to the folder of your choice. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. click Save As. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . and Up Arrow.2 In the Project Browser.

The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. Under Intensity. modify. select Cast Shadows. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. click the Place tab. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click for Place. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Within a Project. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. MA. select By Date. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. At that place. the darker the shadows. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Time and Place. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. specify 35 for Shadow. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. 7 Select Boston. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click . under Sunlight Settings. The higher the number.rvt. and click Advanced Model Graphics. USA for City. Under Shadows Properties. you can create.

8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. however. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 Click OK. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground.NOTE For this step. Cnst. be aware that if you enter a different city. click OK. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Save. for At Level. you can enter any city you wish. click OK. clear Ground Plane. under Sunlight Settings. 16 On the File menu. . 9 Under Sunlight Settings. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. and click OK. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 4 In the Views dialog box. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. 6 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Sheet. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. TIP If the View tab is not available. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. select Arch Portrait. and click Add View to Sheet. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. click Modify. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. click Add View. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click to place it. and notice a view title displays. and click View. right-click the Design Bar. and click OK.

under Graphics. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 12 In the Name dialog box. click . 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . enter Presentation. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Duplicate. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. select No for Show Title. To accomplish this. For this analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. and click OK.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. click OK.

Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. If necessary. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. select Invisible Lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 17 In the Type Selector. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click Filled Region. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. click . fill properties. 19 On the Options Bar. and the boundary of the region. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click . 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click Activate View. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. and select Chain.

verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Region Properties. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. and click Properties. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. under Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. scroll down. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. click Duplicate. 21 On the Design Bar. enter Solid Black.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. 33 On the File menu. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. 24 In the Name dialog box. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. 29 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. and click OK. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. When you are finished drawing the chain. click Save. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. under Graphics. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. and click OK. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. select Solid Fill. under Identity Data. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. and click Deactivate View.

A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. expand Elevations. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. under Views (all).rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. right-click South. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

2 In the Project Browser. under Visibility. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 12 Under Intensity. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. and click OK. 11 Under Shadow Properties. enter Presentation South Elevation. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. 6 Under Visibility. under Sunlight Settings. expand the Walls category. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. expand the Doors category. and click Rename. click . By changing the angle of the sun. click Duplicate. under Elevations. and clear Elevation Swing. click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 15 In the Name dialog box. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. scroll up. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. select Cast Shadows. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. and click OK. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. right-click Copy of South. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. on the Model Categories tab. and click Advanced Model Graphics. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. scroll down. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. specify 35 for Shadow. 8 Click OK. and clear Surface Pattern.

4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. click Save. under Views (all). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .rvt. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. click Add View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and double-click A105 .Presentation. 3 In the Views dialog box. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser.18 On the File menu. expand Sheets. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 . Notice the view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector.Notice the viewport displays a view title. select Viewport: Presentation.

you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 8 On the File menu. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Modify. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 9 Proceed with the next lesson. click Save.

rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 .Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Add the section shown below. select 1: 100 for Scale. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and use the flip arrows if necessary. click Section. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. under Floor Plans. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.

select 1: 100 for Scale. and double-click Section 2. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Section 2 is added to the building model. To accomplish this. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Callout. To fit correctly in the analytique. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown.

double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). 11 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Rename. 10 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 2. click the Model Categories tab. 12 In the Project Browser. expand the Walls category. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). 16 Under Visibility. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. expand the Doors category. and click OK. 15 Under Visibility. right-click Callout of Section 2. and clear Elevation Swing. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. and clear Surface Pattern. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . scroll up. scroll down. click Visibility/Graphics.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box.

clear Crop Region Visible. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 23 On the File menu. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 21 On the Options Bar. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 19 Click OK. click Save. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Extents. Notice the crop region no longer displays.

specify 35 for Shadow. Under Shadows Properties. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 5 In the Name dialog box. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees.rvt. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. click Apply. and click OK.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. double-click Presentation Section 2. select Cast Shadows. In addition. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. In the steps that follow. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. click . under Sunlight Settings. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Under Intensity. under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. open the Project Browser and. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click Duplicate. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Relative to View. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Click Apply. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. select Directly. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 .

You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. and click OK. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. select Override Silhouettes. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. NOTE The line style. under Silhouette Edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. was added to this dataset for training purposes. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 10 On the File menu. Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style.

and click to place the selected view. 5 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Presentation. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click A105 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. under Sheets (all). 3 In the Views dialog box. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 .rvt. The view title no longer displays. select Section: Presentation Section 2. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Add View. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 9 On the Edit toolbar. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and press ENTER. you click to specify the start radius. click . specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. Using a clock as a reference.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. In the steps that follow. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 2. To rotate an object. under Sections (Callout 1).

under Sheets (all). Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 .Presentation. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 . Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter.

14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. click Modify. click Save. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 16 On the File menu. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template. 15 On the Design Bar. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . After applying the view template to a new section view. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.

6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. click Apply View Template. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. click OK. right-click Copy of Section 1. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . 4 In the View Templates dialog box. click Save as View Template. enter Presentation Section 1. 3 In the New View Template dialog box. Now. under Sections (Type 1). rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique.rvt. and click Duplicate. 2 On the View menu.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog box. and click OK. enter Presentation. right-click Section 1. under Sections (Callout 1). you can simply apply the presentation view template. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. under Sections (Type 1).

and elevation swings no longer display. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. under Sheets (all). 18 Right-click the viewport. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click Deactivate View. annotations. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. click Add View. select Presentation. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 15 Right-click the viewport. and click Activate View. 16 On the View menu. 12 In the Views dialog box.Presentation. under Graphics. and click OK.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. double-click A105 . 14 In the Type Selector. Notice the furniture. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. click View Properties. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK. lighting fixtures.

Working in a Callout Analytique. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique.20 On the File menu. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail. In this exercise. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . such as a tracery window or column capital.

enter Presentation Callout. After you add the callout. click Modify. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Callout. 5 In the Rename View dialog box.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). double-click Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown.rvt. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. right-click Callout of Section 1. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select the callout.

and click View Properties. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 .6 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). under Extents. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 Right-click. double-click Presentation Callout. clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.

18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. select Viewport: Presentation. click Add View. and click Deactivate View. under Sheets (all). Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and move it into the position shown below. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Callout. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 17 On the View menu. 12 In the Views dialog box. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 14 In the Type Selector. and click Activate View. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.Presentation. select Custom for View Scale. and click OK. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . double-click A105 .

hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 23 On the Design Bar. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. click Region Properties. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. under Sections (Callout 1). You do not have to replicate the image exactly. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. double-click Presentation Callout. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. activate the viewport. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. In the steps that follow. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. click Filled Region. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 . You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. select Solid Black for Type. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. and make adjustments as necessary. and click OK. When finished. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .26 On the Project Browser.Presentation. click Filled Region. 29 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. click . double-click A105 . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and sketch the rectangle shown below.

select Crop Region Visible. click Finish Sketch. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. click View Properties. and click OK. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. under Extents. 31 On the View menu. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 Select the crop region.30 On the Design Bar.

35 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. click Save. under Extents. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 37 On the File menu. clear Crop Region Visible. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.34 On the View menu. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click OK.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. double-click Isometric. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the View menu. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Scale control. under 3D Views. and click 1: 200. click Orient ➤ Southwest. You then add each view to the presentation sheet.rvt.s and apply shadows to the views. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway.

under 3D Views. 18 On the View menu. Under Shadows Properties. under Sunlight Settings. for At Level. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. Select 1st Flr. select Section Box. enter Isometric 1. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. under 3D Views. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. click . select Cast Shadows. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 16 In the Rename View dialog box.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 15 In the Project Browser. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. under Extents. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Name dialog box. under Silhouette Edges. specify 35 for Shadow. Cnst. and click Duplicate. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric. 9 Click OK. and click OK. click Duplicate. click View Properties. and click Rename. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. right-click Isometric 1. Select Ground Plane. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. double-click Isometric 2. and click Rename. Under Intensity. and click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Isometric 2. 14 In the Project Browser. Select Relative to View. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK.

You can use this to rotate the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 . TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box.20 Select the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box.

select Crop Region. and click OK. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. under Extents. under 3D Views. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. clear Crop Region Visible. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Crop Region. click Modify on the Design Bar. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. the stairs and railings may display. 31 On the View menu. In such a case. click View Properties. 26 On the View menu. double-click Isometric 2. double-click Isometric 3. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. click View Properties. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. under 3D Views. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and click OK.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. enter Isometric 3. 23 In the Project Browser. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. and click Rename. clear Crop Region Visible. Notice the section box no longer displays. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. and click OK. make a copy of the view. When you are finished. 29 Select the section box. under Extents. right-click Isometric 2. either adjust the plane location.

in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. 35 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 36 In the Project Browser. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation.Next. 34 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.Presentation. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. double-click A105 . in the Type Selector. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. select Viewport: Presentation. select Viewport: Presentation.

41 In the Type Properties dialog box. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. select Transparent for Background. and on the Options Bar. The image below shows the lines redrawn. click Region Properties. select Concrete for Type. 39 On the Design Bar. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and then click Edit/New. 42 Click OK twice. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Lines. under Graphics. and click Activate View. 44 Using the drawing tools. click Edit. 38 Select the poche filled region. 43 On the Design Bar. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box.

and click Deactivate View. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box. 49 On the File menu. select Solid Black for Type. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. click Region Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. click Save. a cutaway perspective view. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. you create the final view for the analytique. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view.45 On the Design Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 .

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. then you specify the eye direction and range. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location.rvt. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Cnst. The view opens immediately.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Camera. double-click 1st Flr. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.

and click OK. click . and click OK.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. specify 35 for Shadow. 5 On the View Control Bar. select Override Silhouettes. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Shadows Properties. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Under Intensity. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name.

You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. A section box now cuts through the building model.Add a section box 10 On the View menu. and click OK. click View Properties. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 Select the section box. select Section Box. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. under Extents.

21 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. you must specify the actual size of the image.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. 18 On the View menu. under 3D Views. clear Crop Region Visible. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. under Sheets (all). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. 17 Under Size. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. under Change. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Extents. enter 165 mm for Width. After placing it.14 Select the crop boundary. select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. click Size. 15 On the Options Bar. double-click A105 . Because scale does not apply to perspective views.

select a font. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box.22 On the File menu. under Text. click Save. click Duplicate. select the same font as the title. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 2 On the Options Bar. under Text. enter Title. specify a text size of 40 mm. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click . click Edit/New. click Edit/New. click Text. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise.rvt. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. specify a text size of 6 mm. 9 In the Name dialog box. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . enter Description. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 In the Name dialog box. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click OK. and click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. select Title. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box.

click Modify. click Save.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 15 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the File menu. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 .

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based. they are still related and come from a single source. material set. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. thus the term family. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. shape. In this tutorial. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. each with a different size. 539 .

exterior. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. This makes file management much easier. floors. foundation. The basic walls system family. has wall types that define interior. Walls. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. and partition wall styles. In this lesson. For example. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. exceptions to this rule. because there is only one file to track. while many more are stored in component libraries. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . and roofs. You also learn about the Family Editor. but you cannot create new system families. and roofs are examples of these types of families. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. generic. There are. and when and how to use it. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. Using the Family Editor. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. In addition.rfa extension. floors. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. such as a dome roof. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. for example. however.

and save them from a project file to your library if needed. trees. and also a standalone furniture family component. custom wall treatments. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . Host-based families have components that require hosts. You can load them into projects. You create in-place families only within the current project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . and furniture. transfer them from one project to another.rfa extension. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. for example.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. Standalone families include columns.

When the family opens.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. consider checking the web library and other web resources. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. 2 On the File menu. In this section. and then load it into the project. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. and click Open. After the family has been loaded in the project. Load Family command on the File menu. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. presume it is a bay window that you require. you learn about the Family Editor. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. Within the Windows® environment. In the final exercise. 3 Next. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. you can double-click any file with an . You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. you can drag it into the document window. select the appropriate template. and when to use it. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. modify it as needed. or you can load it using the Load From Library. it should be available within the Type Selector. it is saved with the project. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. In this case. and click Open. To add a family to your project. 5 Finally. if you change the original family. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. In this exercise. how to access it. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. how to access it. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. With Revit Building open. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. such as newsgroups. or 3D. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. If you find a close match. it opens within the Family Editor. navigate to a family file. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . click File ➤ New ➤ Family. open it in the Family Editor. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. you can click File ➤ Open. elevation. However. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. if you have exhausted your external resources. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. such as plan. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. you learn when to use the Family Editor. To start a new family.

8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters.General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 . 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

You create a furniture family. In each lesson. you create it within the project file. 545 . and several annotation families. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. a lighting fixture. Using the installed templates. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. When you create an in-place family. In addition. you create an in-place family.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. not within the Family Editor. you learn how to create a different type of component. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project.

Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. The door type has a variable height and width. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. height. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. and thickness.

5 On the Window menu. Notice the four tiled views. 9 In the Type Selector. are also displayed. 10 On the Options Bar. 2 On the File menu. 4 On the View menu.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. click Tile.rft. Creating a Door Family | 547 . this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 7 Enter ZF. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Family. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. click . Labelled dimensions. 6 Maximize the window. click Symbolic Lines. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. select Doors [projection]. and represent the door opening profile. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. Floor Plan: Ref. Select Metric Door. part of the door properties. and click Open. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. Level.

Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown.

18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. 17 On the Options Bar.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. select Thickness for Label. select Width for Label. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. Creating a Door Family | 549 . NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar.

TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. and select the command from the menu. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 In the Type selector. select Plan Swing [cut]. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. click the down arrow button. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. In the image below. you first specify the arc center. When drawing an arc from center and end points. 23 On the Options Bar. along with the witness line controls.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 On the Design Bar. as shown. then you specify each end point. 24 Enter SI. click . 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click Symbolic Lines. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise.

enter 50 mm for Depth. and click .1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Finish Sketch. under Elevations. click Set Work Plane. Creating a Door Family | 551 . and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Left. double-click Exterior. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 3 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle.

then click to specify the dimension witness line. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Dimension. under Floor Plans. Level. double-click Ref. select Thickness for Label. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference.10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. click Modify and select the dimension. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 Under Detail Levels. and click OK. 2 In the Materials dialog box. and clear Plan/RCP. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. 6 Click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. select Panel for Subcategory. verify that Coarse. click . Left/Right.Dark. click Duplicate. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. and click OK. and When cut in Plan/RCP. click for Texture. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. under AccuRender. click Materials. 20 On the Options Bar. under Name. Medium. click Visibility. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. 3 In the New Material dialog box. enter Oak Door for Name. and click OK. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.No Gloss. select Front/Back. 7 In the Materials dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. and Fine are selected. click . Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. click OK. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. select Oak Door.Red/Stained. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. It also defines its appearance when rendered. click Modify. for Material. 17 On the Options Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. under View Specific Display. you assign a material to the door leaf.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. Creating a Door Family | 553 .

and click OK. click . The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. under Views (all). under 3D Views. double-click View 1. and select Shading with Edges. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Oak Door for Name. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion.15 On the Options Bar. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. for Material. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Model Graphics Style control. click OK. 21 On the View Control Bar. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser.

25 In the Family Types dialog box.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. In the Family Types dialog box. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 1000 mm for Width. 24 On the Design Bar. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. enter 2000 mm for Height. By flexing the new component. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. click Family Types. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Under Other. 27 Click OK. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . Enter 1500 mm for Width. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Under Other. enter 2500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. enter 125 mm for Frame Width.

12 On the File menu. Click Apply. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Define the second new door type. under Template file. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 5 Under Family Types. click New ➤ Project. under Family Types. enter 2134 mm for Height. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. click Door. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. Enter 925 mm for Width. Enter 750 mm for Width. 18 In the Open dialog box. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created.rte is the Template file. Under Create new. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000 mm for Height. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. and click OK. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. select Project. Click Apply. 15 In the New Project dialog box. 6 In the Name dialog box.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 8 Under Family Types. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. click Save. Training Door. Define the third new door type. 3 In the Name dialog box.rfa. click New. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 17 On the Options Bar. 11 Click OK.rfa. click Family Types. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training Door. Enter 1220 mm for Width. click New. click Wall. click New. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Open. enter 2100 mm for Height. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. 9 In the Name dialog box. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. click Load. and click OK. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. and click OK. select it. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. verify that DefaultMetric.

22 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.21 On the View toolbar. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. and select Shading with Edges. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 24 In the Type Selector. Creating a Door Family | 557 . click Door. 23 On the Design Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 26 In the Type Selector. click .

Creating a Window Family In this lesson. This completes the lesson. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. default sill height. and create the window sash as a sweep. 30 You can close all files without saving. Finally. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. and mullion offset.28 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Creating a Door Family. You create the window frame. glazing and mullions as extrusions. height. and specify values for the window width. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family.

Select Metric Window.rft. Creating a Window Family | 559 . click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 5 On the View menu. Labelled dimensions. equally spaced vertical mullions. 7 Enter ZF. are also displayed. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. part of the window properties. 2 On the File menu. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. click Tile. Four views are tiled on your display. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. and click Open. The window type has a variable height and width. you specify the parameters for the new window family. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. 4 On the Window menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

click Family Types. This is the starting point for the new window. When you add labels to dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Click Apply. This process is called “flexing the model. is one of the type parameters. Height and Default Sill Height. also one of the window properties. and click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1300 mm for Height. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 Click OK. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. then sketching the sweep profile. The label name. Change the height and width values again. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Enter 1800 mm for Width.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project.

Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Sketch Profile. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. select Elevation: Right. click . click Ref Plane. click Sketch 2D Path. Creating a Window Family | 561 . 12 On the Options Bar. click Finish Path. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. and click Open View. click . 3 On the Design Bar. and select 1:10. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. click Lines. 2 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. Snap the cursor to each corner. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. 6 On the Design Bar. click the Scale control. 11 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Prefer: Wall faces. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. click Modify. click Dimension. and select the reference plane. click Modify. 15 On the Options Bar. enter Sash for the Name. under Identity Data. 23 On the Options Bar. select Chain and click . 19 On the Design Bar.14 On the Design Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 24 Below the red dot. click . 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. the exact dimensions are not critical. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. Creating a Window Family | 563 . 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. When the lock displays. However. click Modify. When the lock displays. 25 On the Design Bar. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section.

select the line you want to move.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. TIP After adding the dimension. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and specify the dimension value. as shown. click Dimension. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click it to lock the line to the reference plane.

TIP If you don’t see the lock icon.Modify each dimension if necessary. 37 In the Project Browser. click the lock to constrain the present value. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. click . select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click Finish Sweep. Next. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. this is the top of the window opening. expand 3D Views. and double-click View 1. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. click Finish Profile. zoom out until it displays. 33 On the Tools toolbar. When the lock displays. When the lock displays. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. Creating a Window Family | 565 . 35 On the Design Bar. If necessary. 36 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. under Views (all). spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. click the lock to constrain the present value.

Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar.38 In the Project Browser. and enter . click Set Work Plane. and select the option. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. click Lines. 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. click . 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. Chain of walls or lines.45 mm for Depth. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. and select Lock. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. set the following options: ■ ■ Click .50 mm for Offset. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. and lock icons display on each line. Enter . ■ Click .The entire sash outline is selected. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating a Window Family | 567 . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.

double-click Right. 11 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch.9 On the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. double-click View 1. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. 10 In the Project Browser. The window sash extrusion is now complete. under Elevations.

4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. double-click Right. under Elevations. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. and enter 30 mm for Offset.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. as shown. Creating a Window Family | 569 . click . 3 On the Options Bar.

click Dimension. 570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .5 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane.

and select Lock. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. 9 On the Options Bar. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. under Identity Data. and click OK. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. click Set Work Plane. enter 12 mm for Depth. 16 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. click . Creating a Window Family | 571 . click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. double-click Exterior. 11 In the Project Browser. click . 8 Select the reference plane.7 On the Design Bar. and click to create the glass boundary. 13 On the Design Bar.

under 3D Views. and click OK. sash. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Identity Data. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. 21 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the glass extrusion. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. click Finish Sketch. View the window model with frame. click . double-click Right.18 On the Design Bar. After the family is loaded into a project.

enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. click Family Types.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Under Other. Click Apply. Under Other. NOTE After flexing the model. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Creating a Window Family | 573 . You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. enter 1500 mm for Height. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. Click OK. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. For example. enter 1000 mm for Height. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. 27 In the Family Types dialog box.

After adding the dimension.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. the exact location is not critical. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. click Dimension.

select <Add parameter. as shown. Creating a Window Family | 575 .. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 9 On the Options Bar.> for Label.. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. click Modify.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it.

click Family Types. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. enter Mullion Offset for Name. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. Select Instance. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. click Modify. Click OK.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and enter 350 mm as the new value. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. select Dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. and click OK. Under Group parameter under. 14 Click the dimension value. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. under Dimensions. 15 On the Design Bar.

click Lines. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. click Set Work Plane. 20 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. However. After you complete the sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Mullion Offset for Label.17 On the Options Bar. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 18 On the Design Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Creating a Window Family | 577 . 22 On the Design Bar. As you did before. under Specify a new Work Plane. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Modify. and click . it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. enter 14 mm for Depth. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. move the dimension value as shown.

select <Add parameter> for Label. click Dimension. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. click Modify. 30 On the Options Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal.26 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Move the dimension values as shown.

Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. Select the dimension. Under Group parameter under. click Finish Sketch. select Mullion Width for Label. and on the Options Bar. This is changed in later steps. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. 33 On the Design Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Remember. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. enter Mullion Width for Name. Under Parameter Data. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Dimensions. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Click OK.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 579 . Select Type. select Family parameter.

enter 1500 mm for Height. and aligned with the sash edge. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. click Family Types. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. NOTE After flexing the model. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. or undoing the same. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 35 In the Family Types dialog box. In this case. evenly spaced. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Under Other. and click Apply.

44 On the Design Bar. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar.37 In the Family Types dialog box. under Specify a new Work Plane. 42 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click Dimension. Creating a Window Family | 581 . click Set Work Plane. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. click . Click Apply. 39 On the Design Bar. enter 1000 mm for Height. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. and click OK. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 41 On the Design Bar. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Lines. as shown. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. 46 On the Design Bar. Under Other. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name.

49 On the Options Bar.48 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Select the dimension. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Remember. select Mullion Width for Label. click Finish Sketch. select Mullion Width for Label. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Move the dimension value as shown. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges.

If necessary. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 583 . click Join Geometry. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. double-click View 1. 54 In the Project Browser. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. and select the vertical mullions. 56 On the Design Bar. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. click Family Types. you can still see the window. under 3D Views. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. you assign materials to the frame. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 1000 mm for Height. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. sash. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Assigning Materials to the Window Components. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window.57 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. Under Other. enter 1500 mm for Height.

Yellow/. enter Pine Frame for Name. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and the mullions. sash. the sash. click OK. select Stained. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. under AccuRender. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 6 In the Materials dialog box. double-click Exterior. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. 9 Select the window frame sweep. and click OK. No Gloss. click for Texture. and select Shading with Edges.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Elevations. click the Model Graphics Style control. 2 In the Materials dialog box. Dark. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. Creating a Window Family | 585 . 5 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click Materials. click Duplicate. 8 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK. 13 In the Materials dialog box. Medium. click OK. verify that Coarse. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 Select the glass extrusion. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. click Visibility. 21 On the Options Bar. under View Specific Display. 16 Under Detail Levels. click Modify. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. under Graphics. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Edit for Visibility. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). and Fine are selected. and click OK. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click . 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Identity Data. 23 Under Detail Levels. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. click for Material. under 3D Views. Medium. 18 On the Design Bar. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). clear the other view options.10 On the Options Bar. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. under View Specific Display. and click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. and Fine are selected. verify that Coarse. select Pine Frame for Name. double-click Right. double-click View 1.

You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. Defining New Window Types. The window frame. Creating a Window Family | 587 . mullions. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. and glass display their assigned materials. sash.25 Zoom in on a window corner.

In the Family Types dialog box. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. click Family Types. enter 2000 mm for Height. 2 On the Design Bar. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply.

enter 1000 mm for Height. 9 Under Family Types. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK.The window height is doubled. under Family Types. click New. click New. Enter 1250 mm for Height. Creating a Window Family | 589 . specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click Apply. and click OK. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. 7 In the Name dialog box. Click Apply. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name.

click to start a new project based on your default template. click Wall. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 25 In the Type Selector. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name.11 In the Family Types dialog box. click Window. 15 On the File menu. 23 On the Design Bar.rfa. 13 In the Name dialog box. navigate to the location of your Training Window. click Thin Lines. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. click Window. 20 In the Open dialog box. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 32 On the View menu. 29 In the Type Selector. click Save. click Load. select it. Training Window. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click Modify. Click Apply. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. clear Tag on Placement. click New. Notice the detail that displays. 33 Zoom in on the center window. Click OK. 19 On the Options Bar. and click Open. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. 31 On the Design Bar. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall.rfa file. Click Apply. Enter 1300 mm for Height.

You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Finally. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . 35 On the View Control Bar. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family.34 On the View toolbar. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control. You begin by creating the desktop. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. drawer base. rolltop. and drawers as extrusions. click .

Floor Plan: Ref. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 2 On the File menu. their exact location is not critical. 6 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Level. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. and click Open. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. they represent the furniture centerline axes. click Ref Plane. 4 Maximize the view. Select Metric Furniture.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise.rft. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the View menu. click New ➤ Family. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click Dimension. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. 9 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . 12 On the Design Bar. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. and ending at the right reference plane. as shown. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. 13 Select the left reference plane.

proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. and ending at the lower reference plane. as shown. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. as shown.15 On the Design Bar. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane.

select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. Afterwards. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. 19 Select the upper. click Modify. TIP To do this. horizontal reference plane. click Modify. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. 21 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar.

24 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. Under Parameter Data. Select Type.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. Click OK.> for Label. For Group parameter under. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter..> for Label. 27 On the Options Bar. Select Type. select Family parameter. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. For Group parameter under. select Dimensions. select <Add parameter. enter Depth for Name. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data.. enter Length for Name. select Dimensions. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .. Click OK.

Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Therefore. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 3000 mm for Length. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. you can still see the model. it will also adapt to the same changes. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . and enter 100 mm for Depth. NOTE In the image below. under Specify a new Work Plane. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. under Elevations. Your lines may have a lighter weight. 5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 11 In the Project Browser. and click to select all four symbolic lines. 2 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. double-click Front. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. Level for Name. select Level: Ref. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. click Symbolic Lines. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. 8 On the Options Bar. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines.

and select the bottom edge. as shown. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension.. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge..The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. select <Add parameter. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. and select the top edge. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. click Modify. click Modify. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.> for Label. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar.

and click Apply. select Dimensions.> for Label. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. Select Type. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Family parameter. Click OK. click Modify. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. 29 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. enter Thickness for Name. Enter 750 mm for Height. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click Apply. and click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. 25 On the Options Bar. Enter 1200 mm for Height.. Under Parameter Data. enter 2000 mm for Length. For Group parameter under. Click OK. Select Type. Click OK. select <Add parameter. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. For Group parameter under. you can still see the model. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter Height for Name. click Family Types. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. 27 On the Design Bar..

2 On the Design Bar. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. click . Level. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. 6 On the Design Bar. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. Click the lock icon as shown. double-click Ref. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . click Dimension. under Floor Plans. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. click Ref Plane.

and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Set Work Plane. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Level: Ref. click Lines. and click OK. Lock the dimension as shown. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. Level for Name. 13 On the Options Bar. as shown.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 10 On the Design Bar. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . two lock icons display. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base.After you complete the rectangle. click Dimension.

18 On the Design Bar. click . click the Mirror tool. You can also highlight the entire line chain. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 Select the four sketched lines. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. . 20 On the Tools toolbar. as shown below at the cursor. using the TAB key. 23 For the align-to reference. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. 22 On the Tools toolbar. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. click Modify.

27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 26 On the Design Bar. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. click Dimension. A lock icon displays.

31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. select Dimensions. select <Add parameter. select Drawer Base Width for Label. click Modify. Select Type. as shown. 30 On the Options Bar. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .> for Label. 33 On the Options Bar.28 Add two final dimensions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base... 34 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. Click OK.

a lock icon displays.35 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . click Finish Sketch. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 37 On the Tools toolbar. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. under Elevations. click . 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. After the alignment. click it to lock the alignment.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 42 On the View menu. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. and click Apply. notice that annotations display in this view. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. Click Apply. 47 On the Design Bar. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Click OK. 49 In the Family Types dialog box.40 On the Design Bar. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. and click OK. click the Scale control and select 1:20. However. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. click . you can still see the model. 45 On the View Control Bar. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click Visibility/Graphics. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 41 On the View toolbar. click Modify. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height.

Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . click . Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. under Elevations. and click to specify the upper left corner. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 2 On the Design Bar.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Lines. click Set Work Plane. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. double-click Right.

then the lower horizontal sketch line. click .8 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. and lock it. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 Select the desk top. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. and lock the alignment. and lock it. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. click Dimension. 11 On the Design Bar. then select the right parallel sketch line.

15 Select the left vertical sketch line. . click Lines. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click the Fillet arc tool. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete.13 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . click Finish Sketch. the upper sketch line. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 14 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. 16 On the Design Bar.

double-click Front. click . under Elevations. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. select the left edge of the rolltop.Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. select the right edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click the lock icon.

click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. click Family Types. You can also use dimension constraints. The desk should adapt to all the changes. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Height. If not. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. enter 4000 mm for Length.21 On the View toolbar. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . you can still see the model. and click Apply.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Select Generic Annotation.rfa. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. The new room tag is now ready for use. notice that there is only one view available. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. select Training Files.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template.rft. In the left pane of the New dialog box. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. and click Open. and click OK. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. select Area. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. select Ceiling Finish. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box.

3 On the Options Bar. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. click Lines. click . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 On the Options Bar. click .

enter North Line for Name. click New. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Object Styles. 17 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select North Line. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. click Modify. in the North Line row. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. select 3 for Line Weight. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . and select the upper vertical line. 16 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Modify.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of.

Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. 5 Click OK. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 12 On the Design Bar. click Sheet. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. In the New Project Dialog box. select it. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. click Browse. click Symbol. click OK. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson.rfa. 7 On the File menu. and click Open. click New ➤ Project. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. click Modify. select Training North Arrow. Select the DefaultMetric. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. Training North Arrow.rte file. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. select A1 metric. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 2 In the New Project dialog box. select Training Files. 8 In the Open dialog box.rfa. 10 In the Type Selector. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and labels. and enter -25 for Offset. text. 3 On the Options Bar. graphics. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and your project data. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. Select A0 metric. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines.The titleblock has linework. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. click . and click Open. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. In the left pane of the New dialog box. click New ➤ Titleblock.rft. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner.

Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. . 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 7 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. and enter 140 for Offset. click . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and click . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown.

click Lines. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. and select the second and third horizontal lines. click Modify. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. press CTRL. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 13 In the Type Selector. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. enter 30 for Offset.12 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. 21 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . and enter 20 for Offset. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click . and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line.

click Import/Link ➤ Image. and labels to your titleblock. text notes. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. and click Open. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. you add a company logo. 2 In the Open dialog box. navigate to Training Files/Common.jpg. select Company Logo. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Modify. The titleblock linework is now complete.25 On the Design Bar.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click . click Text.4 Zoom in on the logo. under Text. click Duplicate. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 10 for Text Size. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. click Edit/New. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. in the text box. 11 Click OK twice. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . 9 In the Name dialog box. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and select Bold.

click Modify. and select the last text note. and add an address and phone number as shown.Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. and drag the text note down as shown. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. address. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. 18 Select the drag handle. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. Add consultant name. click Text. select Text : 8mm.

click . and select the consultant text note. click Modify.22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 24 On the Options Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 .

644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

click Edit/New. enter 5 for Text Size. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. under Text.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. enter 5mm for Name. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 41 On the Options Bar. click . 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 29 On the Options Bar. select Project Issue Date. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . 32 In the Name dialog box. 34 Click OK twice. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. and enter Sheet Number:. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. click Text. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. click Label. and enter Date:. and enter Drawn By:. select Text : 5mm. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and click OK. click Duplicate. and enter Checked By:.

44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to specify the label location. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Checked By and click OK. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. select Drawn By. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field.

click Edit/New. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Duplicate. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . under Text. 55 Click OK twice. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 59 On the Options Bar. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Sheet Number. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. enter 15 for Text Size.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. click . click Label. 50 On the Options Bar. select Project Number. click Center and Middle. enter 15mm Label for Name. and click OK. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 53 In the Name dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. select Label : 15mm Label. and click to specify the label location. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box.

and click OK. 70 On the Options Bar. select Client Name. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click to specify the label location. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 75 Click OK twice. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Label. click . and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. under Text. and click OK. select Project Name. click Duplicate. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 4 for Text Size. 73 In the Name dialog box. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. enter 4mm Label. and click OK.

navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. and click Open. 7 Click OK. click Browse. select it.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. text. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location.rte file. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 77 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 5 In the Open dialog box. click Left and Middle. click Sheet. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select Training Files. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . click OK. 80 On the Design Bar. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. and click Open. select File Path. select 4mm Label. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. The titleblock graphics.rfa file. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Load. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. and labels are now complete. and click OK. click New ➤ Project.rfa. In the New Project Dialog box. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu.

and click OK. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. enter Name for Drawn By. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. 2005 for Project Issue Date. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. click Project Information. 14 Click OK. 12 On the Settings menu. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. click . Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. Enter In Progress for Project Status. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Enter Office Building for Project Name.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the titleblock. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.

you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. click Open. and double-click South. select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. To change the units of measurement to meters. click Project Units. click Orient ➤ Southeast. set the Area to Square meters. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Set the Length units to millimeters. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. Select c_Pantheon. Next. on the Settings menu. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . and click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt. and set the suffix to None. expand Elevations. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).

click . The center wall section view is displayed. and click OK. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section . 7 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Name dialog box. select Pick a Plane. and click Open View. 12 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Roofs for Family Category. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis.Center. click Create. click Axis. enter Dome for Name.

15 On the Options Bar. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. 17 Move the cursor out. Creating In-Place Families | 653 . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click Lines. click .Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar.

click . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. and select Chain. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 On the Options Bar. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle.The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.

Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click Lines. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 23 On the Options Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 655 .Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 27 On the Options Bar. click . click .

and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 32 On the Options Bar. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. click Lines. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click and select Chain.

click Revolution Properties. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. 42 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. 38 In the Materials dialog box. click for Material. click . click Finish Family. click . click OK. and click OK.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. select Concrete .Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. 40 On the Design Bar.

Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu.Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. select Pick a Plane. and click Open View. 11 On the Options Bar. select Floors for Family Category. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. double-click South. click Create. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar.Center. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. click . select Section: Wall Section . 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click Axis. click Set Work Plane. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. enter Concave Floor for Name. 3 In the Name dialog box.

for the start point of the floor profile as shown.12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 14 On the Options Bar.O. Footing level line and the axis. click . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. click Lines. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. and select Chain. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. Creating In-Place Families | 659 .

click OK. and click OK. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. click for Material.O. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click 3D Section View. click Finish Family. click Finish Sketch. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. select Cobblestone for Name. 25 On the Design Bar.18 Specify the intersection of the T. click Revolution Properties. 22 In the Materials dialog box. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 In the Element Properties dialog box.O. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.

formula-based parameters. During this tutorial. The truss also has multiple types. methodology.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. and detail level controls. assigned subcatecories. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. In exercises that become increasingly complex. 661 . you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. you will understand the process. not specifically how to make a floor truss. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. In this case. At the end of this tutorial.

you determine the requirements of the new component. and structural walls. In this lesson. Take this into consideration during your design planning. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. In addition. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. it is not the best solution. Two types should be created. a generic floor-based component might work. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. and also works intuitively with them. In this case. For every complexity added to a family. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. For training purposes. It should also be an available option within a beam system. you should avoid over-designing the component. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. In the next exercise. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. Although this solution is possible. In this case. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . this must be a structural beam component. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. NOTE When creating a new family. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. beams.

Selecting the Family Template. Depending on the family you are designing. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . In addition. would require Instance or Type parameters. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. such as wood type.■ What materials need the most control? These materials. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. 4 Continue with the next exercise. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. the planning stage and questions may differ. In the previous exercise. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. What types are most commonly used? In this training case.

■ Metric Structural Framing . There are two structural framing templates provided. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components.rft. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there. ■ Metric Structural Framing . do not open this template. scroll to the structural framing templates. Because of its simplicity. and notice the preview. 3 In the New dialog box.Complex and Trusses. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. This template is the best starting point for the new family. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. You should be in the Metric Templates folder.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. 5 In the New dialog box. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. scroll through the various template options. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. notice the preview. and display functions required by structural beams. for example: wall based or floor based. spacing.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. On the right side of the New dialog box. select Metric Generic Model floor based. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . navigate to it. In addition. Select it so that the preview displays. For training purposes.Beams and Braces.Beams and Braces. 4 In the New dialog box. Like most generic family templates.Complex and Trusses. If you are not in this folder.rft. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing . it is not the best starting point for the beam family.rft and notice the preview.

you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. double-click View 1. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Creating the Component Skeleton. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. lines. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. under Elevations. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . Level. however.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. double-click Front. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. you add the reference planes.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. Floor Plan: Ref. Level In this view. 10 Maximize the view. Like many templates. Therefore.Beams and Braces. Floor Plan: Ref. under 3D Views. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. click the Training Files icon.

Level. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. Reference Plane: Left. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. In the project plan view image below. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. you add reference planes to the beam design. notice the location of the beam extents. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. In the image below. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. double-click Ref. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock.

■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Before adding new reference planes. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . click . 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. click Ref Plane. In a later exercise. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.

8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. To do this. double-click Front. click on the Edit toolbar. Add ref. Level. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level as the mirror axis. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 10 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations. Level. and select the Level: Ref.

These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. click . This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 14 On the Options Bar. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. click Ref Plane. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 . click to place it as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. click to place it. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. click to place it as shown. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left.

21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 22 On the Options Bar. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. which you do in the next exercise. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. double-click Ref. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. Before you move on to the next exercise. 19 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. specify an Offset of 238 mm. specify an Offset of 200 mm. Level. 24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier.

This tool is the aligned dimension tool.rfa. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. Wood Floor Truss. 2 On the Options Bar. click Modify. navigate to the folder of your choice. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. click . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Dimension. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. and click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 28 In the Save As dialog box. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. Make sure you remember where you saved it. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. After adding the dimension.25 On the Design Bar. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.

Place the dimension as shown. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Level. 9 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. under Elevations. the Center reference plane. 6 On the Design Bar. and the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. click Modify.4 On the Design Bar. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Dimension. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. place the dimension to the left as shown. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref.

Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 . Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. and place it below the dimension you added previously. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model.11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. add two dimensions as shown.

you will add additional reference planes. Throughout the tutorial. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. Wood Floor Truss. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. dimensions. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. Level. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. it becomes a parameter. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. consider making it a type parameter. In this exercise. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In the next exercise. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project.rfa. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. consider making it a type parameter. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. under Floor Plans.15 Add four dimensions as shown. In addition. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. If the component has material that varies per component. consider making it an instance parameter. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. double-click Ref. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. and constraints as needed. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. When you design a new family. Creating New Length Parameters.

enter Depth for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 7 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. under Elevations. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Click OK. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 3 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. enter Chord Width for Name. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. double-click Front. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 .2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. Under Parameter Data. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. select Add parameter for Label. Select Type. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Add parameter for Label.

Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Add parameter for Label. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. Under Parameter Data.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. enter Center Chase Width for Name. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. enter Chord Thickness for Name. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Type.

select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar. select Chord Thickness for Label.TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model.

this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. click Save. you can drag it to the opposing corner. Flexing the model means to change parameter values.18 On the Design Bar. Wood Floor Truss. When you open the Family Types dialog. When you flex a family.rfa. When you open the Family Types dialog box. After you verify this. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. 19 Click Cancel. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dataset Continue to use the dataset. This is not limited to length parameters. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. When you load this family into a project. In the Family Types dialog box. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a new constraint. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. click Family Types. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. Adding or modifying a parameter. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Nesting a component. 20 On the File menu. If you add a new material parameter. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Dimensions. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. In this exercise. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. Flexing the Component Model. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected.

80 mm for Chord Thickness. In addition. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. Level. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. under Dimensions. enter 600 mm for Depth. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. click Family Types. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. and click Apply. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 .Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box.

reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. Click Apply. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. When working within the Family Editor. 6 On the File menu. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. under Elevations. double-click Left. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way.rfa. Adding Solid Geometry. After creating the extrusions. After flexing the design. you align and lock their position. Wood Floor Truss. After adding the chords. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

When using the Trim tool. 10 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Reference Plane: Member Left. click Name. click . click Lines. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes.3 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click . Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . 11 On the Options Bar. click the part of the line you want to keep. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. 8 On the Tools toolbar. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. and verify that Lock is selected. click Lines. the lines will no longer overlap. and select Lock. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK.

16 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 15 On the Design Bar. 3 Select the chord extrusions. click Finish Sketch.rfa. double-click Front. under Elevations. under 3D Views. double-click View 1. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser.13 On the Tools toolbar. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry. click . Wood Floor Truss. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. 2 Enter SD. click Save. 17 On the File menu.

not the member right or member left reference planes. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. Therefore. click Family Types.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. as shown. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. and click OK. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. click Apply. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . On the Design Bar. as shown. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. enter 3000 for Length. and click Apply. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 6000 for Length. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. click Dimension.

depth. you add the web members. Afterwards. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. use the Align tool and add the constraint. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 14 Click OK. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. and click Apply. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Flex the chord width. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. double-click View 1. In a later exercise. under 3D Views. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. click Family Types. Later in this lesson. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. Therefore.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. In this particular case. enter 6000 for Length.

17 On the Design Bar.rfa. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. such as doubling. Wood Floor Truss. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. Therefore.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. try picking a method. click Family Types. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. and click OK. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Click Apply. click Save. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. 20 On the File menu. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Creating Additional Solid Geometry. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. that allows you to easily return to the original values. TIP When flexing. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth. Dataset Continue to use the dataset.

You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. under Floor Plans. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click . click the Hide/Isolate control. click Lines. click . 10 On the Design Bar. the lines will no longer overlap. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. vertical member of the center chase as shown. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and click Hide Object. and verify that Lock is selected. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. double-click Ref. and verify that Lock is selected. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Level. click . Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 5 On the Design Bar. click . 6 On the Options Bar. vertical member of the center chase as shown.

15 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. and after the alignment. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. 19 For the align-to reference. click Finish Sketch. under Elevations. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. and lock the alignment as shown. 16 In the Project Browser. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . This next process is very important. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. click Align.

688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select Add Parameter for Label. Click Apply. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. The truss should adapt to all the changes. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth.22 On the Design Bar. If it does not. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit. This will make subsequent work much easier. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. and click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. redo any problematic alignments and constraints. click Family Types. click Modify. 29 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. click Lines. select the upper horizontal reference plane. under Dimensions. on the lower chord. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. click Family Types. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 37 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. click Apply. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. under Parameter Data. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . Click OK. Select Instance. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. 33 On the Design Bar. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. enter19mm for Offset. double-click Right. select Trimmable End Length for Label. 39 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. click . and verify that Lock is selected. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Elevations. 41 On the upper chord.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. and click OK. 42 On the Options Bar.

54 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 53 On the Design Bar. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. on the lower chord. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 46 On the Design Bar. 51 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and verify that Lock is selected. select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.44 On the Tools toolbar. under Constraints. 56 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . double-click Left. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. 55 On the upper chord. click Lines. click . 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 48 On the Design Bar. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 19mm for Offset. and click OK.

Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. 65 On the Tools menu. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. click Align. and click OK. under Elevations. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. 60 On the Design Bar. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 62 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value.58 On the Tools toolbar.

Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. this is the align-to point. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. click Modify. under 3D Views. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 75 In the Project Browser. Make adjustments to account for the right side. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Click Apply.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. double-click View 1. and lock the alignment. Click Apply. 71 On the Design Bar. 73 In the Family Types dialog box. TIP When you finish the alignments. and lock the alignment. if you select the end extrusion. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. click Family Types. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. and click OK. fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder.76 Save the Family. NOTE Close any open families or projects. click the Training Files icon. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. click Open. 77 Proceed to the next lesson. If you are comfortable with your design. it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . Testing the Family in a Project. Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. and a rim joist. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. a sill. After you load it into the project. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. Although you could continue using the previous family. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. you can continue using it in the next lesson.

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise. click Open. 2 On the Design Bar. expand Families. click the Training Files icon. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Load into Projects. expand Structural Framing. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. Notice that the project file is now active. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rvt file located in the Metric folder.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. 3 In the Project Browser. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. Open the m_WWF1. If you had multiple projects or families open.rfa. you add several instances of the truss family to the project.

Southeast Isometric. The rim joist was added as a beam. a wood sill. expand Views. click Beam. therefore. 4 In the Type Selector. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. double-click 3D . under Floor Plans. and a wood rim joist. under 3D Views. double-click Level 1.Southeast Isometric.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. a slab. 6 In the Project Browser. This project consists of foundation walls. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. expand 3D Views. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 2 In the Project Browser. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . and double-click 3D . 5 Using point-to-point insertion. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams.

7 In the Project Browser. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. not the wall or rim joist. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Level 1. under 3D Views. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D .Southeast Isometric.Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. You do not need to be precise. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. under Floor Plans.

the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. 14 On the Options Bar. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. 11 On the File menu. click Undo Drag. 12 In the Save as dialog box. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. click Edit Family. Working with Nested Subcomponents. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . click Save as. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. In the next lesson. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. click Yes. 10 On the Edit menu. Because the family is already open. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. This should return the project to its original dimension.

This will aid in the placement of the wood web. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. This will make aligning the wood web easier. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. Open the m_Wood_Web. under Floor Plans. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. 4 On the View Control Bar. click the Training Files icon. 7 In the Type Selector. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. This family is a single extrusion as shown. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. click Component.rfa is the active file. 5 On the File menu. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. and click Hide Object. double-click Ref. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. Level. click Hide/Isolate. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the Project Browser.

they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. under Elevations. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . You will align the left web component first. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. Do not select it. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 . 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. double-click Front. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. click Modify. 13 For the align-to point. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. In the following steps.9 On the Design Bar. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. 10 In the Project Browser.

18 Add two reference planes as shown. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. In the steps that follow.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. In addition. 19 On the Tools menu. click Align. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. click Ref Plane. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. click Modify. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. 16 On the Design Bar. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width.

Place the dimension as shown. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. Place the dimension as shown. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 .23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. click Dimension.

Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. Click OK. under Parameters. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. 5 Click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. and click Properties. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. In the Type Parameter dialog box. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. length. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. click Save As. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. 28 In the Save As dialog box. under Parameter Data. Select Length for Type. click Add. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. you add new parameters to control the web components. you label these dimensions. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Modify. select WebDepth. Select Type. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. or the width of the center chase. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. 26 On the Design Bar. under Other. Select Common for Discipline. click Edit/New. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. 27 On the File menu. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. under Constraints. click OK. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. 4 In the Family Types dialog box.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. click OK. enter Depth . 12 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Family Types dialog box.In the next exercise. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.

click Add.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. click Add. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. Select Instance. 16 Under Other. under Parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. Select Common for Discipline. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 .Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. Select Length for Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. which must remain at least 150mm long. Click OK. under Parameter Data. Click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. In addition. under Parameter Data. click Family Types. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. Select Length for Type. under Parameters. enter (Length . under Parameters. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. This parameter is primarily for convenience. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. click Add. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. After you enter the formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. 19 Under Constraints. Select Instance.

select Add parameter for Label. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. Select Common for Discipline. Select Instance. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. under Parameter Data. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. 32 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. select Webhalflength for Label. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 31 Under Constraints. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Parameter Data. Select Instance. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. click Family Types. 22 Under Constraints. Click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. click Modify.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Integer for Type. 23 Click OK.

34 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. double-click View 1. Click Apply. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Properties. Because you have added and constrained new components. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . 40 In the Project Browser. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. click OK. click Family Types. under 3D Views. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. In the Type Properties dialog box. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 42 On the Design Bar. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. The truss should adapt to all the changes. click Edit/New. click Modify. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. select WebArrayLength. 39 On the Design Bar. If it does not.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Click Apply. Creating an array requires two basic steps. When picking the corner. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. add alignment constraints. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Enter 3 for Number. then you specify the move end point. click Array. 46 Proceed to the next exercise.44 In the Family Types dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Select Constrain. and click OK. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 4 On the Options Bar. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. you array the nested web components. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. First. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Select 2nd for Move to. click Save. under Elevations. double-click Front. 3 On the Edit menu. you specify the move start point. 45 On the File menu. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

16 Zoom out to view the truss. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move to. place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Select Constrain. Enter 3 for Number. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . then select the line twice. click Modify. When picking the corner. click Align. When picking the corner. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. When picking the corner. 15 On the Design Bar.6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. 10 On the Edit menu. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. click Modify. 19 In the left array. 18 On the Tools menu. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. 11 On the Options Bar. click Array.

Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. 25 On the Options Bar. select WebArrayNum for Label. 28 On the Options Bar. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. If you do not lock the edges of the array. NOTE Do not select the array value. click Modify. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . NOTE This step is very important. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. 22 Within the right array. 21 Within the left array. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. align and lock the two right web components. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. select WebArrayNum for Label.

This is because earlier in the tutorial. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. 33 Delete the dimension. 36 Select the reference plane. 35 Select the reference plane. 34 On the Tools menu. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. Left. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. Member Left. as the align-to point. click Align. and lock the alignment as shown. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 . Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end.

under Dimensions. this solution has little. double-click View 1. Click Apply. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. click Family Types. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. click Modify. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. under 3D Views. and prepare the view for flexing. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. Enter 12000mm for Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. 46 On the Design Bar. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. however. 44 Click Apply. if any. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If it does not. Therefore. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. click Family Types. in this case. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. significant impact. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 37 On the Design Bar. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.NOTE With most beam families.

Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . select Override parameter values of existing types. and click Yes. these steps have been reduced. Click Apply. View 1.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. you reload the truss family into the project. should be open. click Load into Projects. Reloading a Family into a Project.rvt. however. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. and click OK. m_WWF1. the project. Enter 6000mm for Length. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. displays. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Reload the truss into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. 49 On the File menu. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. for training and time purposes. click Save. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. In addition to the truss family.

you create and apply subcategories and materials. under Floor Plans. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 9 Proceed to the next lesson. Applying Subcategories.Southeast Isometric. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. click Undo Drag. double-click Level 1. Materials. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.4 In the Project Browser. Materials. and Parameters In this lesson. and Parameters. double-click 3D . You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. under 3D Views. In the next lesson. 7 On the Edit menu. Applying Subcategories.

and Parameters | 713 . Materials. you create new subcategories within the truss family. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. click the Training Files icon. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. Open the m_WWF2. click Open. Within the family. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. In this dataset. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Applying Subcategories. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In addition.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint.rvt file located in the Metric folder. the material values were set to By Category by default.

12 On the Settings menu. and expand the category Structural Framing. you have more control over component visibility within a project. click OK. under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. click Undo Object Styles. click New. If there was a metal beam in this building model. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Object Styles. and click OK. 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. it would also have the wood material applied to it.2 On the Settings menu. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click Object Styles. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed.Timber for Name. In addition. click Edit Family.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. 4 On the Structural Framing category line. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. 8 On the Edit menu. Notice the Wood . 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor. 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Wood . 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

17 In the New Material dialog box. select Natural. 29 On the Options Bar. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 16 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. and click OK. select Other. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. under Identity Data. 27 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. 18 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. under AccuRender. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss. click .No Gloss for Name. click Modify. Materials. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. click Edit Family. Yellow. click . click OK. click . and click OK. click Check None. 20 In the Materials dialog box. Applying Subcategories. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. The web component family opens in a 3D view. click Duplicate. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. and Parameters | 715 . 24 In the Filter dialog box. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. 42 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. select Wood Floor Truss . navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine.rvt. click . 43 In the Element Properties dialog box.Webs. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Yellow. 38 In the Material Library dialog box.No Gloss for Name. under AccuRender. under Modify Subcategories. select Override parameter values of existing types. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box.Webs for Name. and click Yes. click OK. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box.Webs for Subcategory. enter Wood Floor Truss . click Duplicate. 39 In the Materials dialog box. click New. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Load into Projects. select Natural. 37 In the Materials dialog box. 36 In the New Material dialog box. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. select m_WWF2. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box.31 On the Settings menu. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box.rfa. enter Wood Floor Truss . and click OK. click . and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. click OK. under Identity Data. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.Webs subcategory. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click OK. 35 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. click Load into Projects. click Object Styles. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss .

49 In the Reload Family dialog box. 50 On the Settings menu. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. 2 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. Materials. 55 On the Edit menu. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. under Categories. under Visibility. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. 53 On the View menu. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. click Object Styles. the stick symbols continue to display. select Override parameter values of existing types. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. expand Structural Framing. 57 In the Save as dialog box. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. Creating Material Parameters. click Save As. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. however. and click OK. and click Yes. 52 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. expand Structural Framing. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. 56 On the File menu. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. Applying Subcategories. and Parameters | 717 .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 In the Materials dialog box. click . click . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 22 On the Design Bar. select m_WWF2. click Edit/New.Steel for Name. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. under Parameters. click Modify. click . under Materials and Finishes. 8 Click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. select Metal . this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. and select the component. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 11 In the Filter dialog box. and click Yes. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. under Materials and Finishes. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). notice the default material is By Category. under Parameter Data. Click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. and click OK. click Family Types. and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. press TAB. click OK. Select Common for Discipline. click Load into Projects. 27 On the Options Bar. click the button to the right of the Material value field. do not assign a material to the parameter. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss.rvt. and click OK. under Other. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. click OK. 21 Click OK twice. Select Material for Type. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. Select Instance. In this case. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Floor Truss Material. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. select Floor Truss Material. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. When reloaded into a project. click Add. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. click Check None. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box.31 On the Design Bar. Controlling Component Visibility. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. click the Training Files icon. Open the m_WWF3.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Modify. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. You can save the open files if you wish. click Detail Level. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. click Save. However. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. 34 Close any open files. all elements display at all times in all views. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. a new dataset is supplied. 32 On the File menu. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. click Open. In the next lesson. 33 On the File menu. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. and click Coarse. click Close.

15 On the Options Bar. Clear Left/Right. 6 On the Options Bar. Click OK. clear Plan/RCP. 9 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. click Visibility. click Load into Projects. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display.2 Select a floor truss. Click OK. clear Coarse.rfa. and click OK. click Edit Family. Under Detail Levels. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. 8 Select the web extrusion. clear Plan/RCP. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Edit Family. Click OK. click Visibility. Under Detail Levels. clear Coarse. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click Yes. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Under Detail Levels. clear Coarse. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar. click Visibility. clear Plan/RCP. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. 18 On the Options Bar. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Clear Left/Right.

Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. 28 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. click Detail Level. clear Coarse.rvt. select m_WWF3. 21 On the Options Bar. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. under Floor Plans. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 26 On the View Control Bar. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. and click Coarse. and click Medium. and click Yes. and click OK. click Load into Projects. double-click Level 1. select Override parameter values of existing types.

and click OK. 11 Click OK. Notice the chord changes width. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. In the final exercise. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. 6 In the New dialog box. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. under Dimensions. under Family Types. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. click New. under Family Types. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. 30 In the Save As dialog box. click Family Types. and click Apply. enter 64mm for Chord Width. and click Apply. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Edit Family. 8 In the New dialog box. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss.29 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. enter 89x38 for Name. NOTE When creating new components. enter 64x38 for Name. Creating Component Types. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating Component Types In this lesson. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. The truss returns to its original designed value. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. click Save As. and click OK. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. click New.

14 In the Reload Family dialog box. click Family Types. double-click 3D . 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. if(Length < 7500. 20 On the Design Bar. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. click Save. click Modify. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. and click OK. select m_WWF3. 400. 286. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. click Apply. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 350. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. click Edit Family. select 64x38. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. Creating Conditional Formulas. and click Yes.Southeast Isometric. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. 400))) 6 Click Apply. Creating Component Types | 723 .Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. select 89x38. select Override parameter values of existing types. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. enter 6000 for length. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 21 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Type Selector. Notice the two beam types. enter 8000 for length. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. 16 In the Type Selector. under Dimensions. click Beam. and click Apply. <result-if-true>. under 3D Views. Notice the truss depth increases. and click OK. 22 On the File menu. if(Length < 9000. click Load into Projects.

724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 17 Close any open files.Southeast Isometric. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. select Override parameter values of existing types. double-click Level 1. select m_WWF3. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 16 On the File menu. under 3D Views. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click Yes.rvt. under Floor Plans. double-click 3D . 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. click Load into Projects. click Save. You have completed this tutorial. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box.

Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. 725 . Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Finally.

Open the c_Area. click Project Units. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. For Unit Suffix. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .rvt file located in the Common folder. If you are using metric units. click Open. select Millimeters. it is not necessary in this exercise. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. right-click in the Design Bar. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. click OK. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. select mm. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. 3 Under Area. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. select 2 decimal places. In the Area Settings dialog box. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. select Square meters. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click Area Analysis. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. your values will be different. expand Floor Plans. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. For Rounding. click the Training Files icon. In the final exercise. select m2 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Length. Click OK. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. For Unit Suffix. These schemes define spatial relationships. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. click Area Settings. expand Views (all).

click Area Plan. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. or 0. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. When you select Yes in this dialog box. If you select No. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. ■ 8 Click Cancel. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. the system-computed height defaults to the level. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . you must manually add these boundary lines. forming a closed loop. Click OK. 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). click Area Tag. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). 12 In the Project Browser. click the Room Calculations tab.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.

NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area Plan. click Area Boundary. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . you create a new area plan for rentable space. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Next. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. and store area. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. common areas. 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model.

verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 22 On the Design Bar.20 On the Options Bar. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 . click Modify. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 26 On the Options Bar. If you do not select this option. you can either draw them or pick them. click . the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click Area Tag. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. When you pick the walls. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. When you add area boundary lines. 24 On the Design Bar.

31 On the Options Bar. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. click Modify and select the tag. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Area Tag. click .27 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog box. Click OK. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 30 On the Design Bar. Click OK.

34 Add an area tag to the building model core. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. enter Core for Name. and select Store Area for Area Type. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 . Notice that within the two store areas. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right.

732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click Save. In the next exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.rvt. name the project Area-in progress. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Color Fill. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. and when the color legend displays. In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save. click to place it.36 On the File menu. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.

select Area Type and click Add. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. under Category. 7 Under Available fields. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click the Fields tab. and click OK. select Areas (Rentable). 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box.3 When the dialog box displays.

734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

curtain systems. floors. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roofs. After you make building elements. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. In this tutorial. building elements. If you modify a massing face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. you can specify the view to display massing elements. you then need to update the building face. 735 .Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. or both. At any time. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model.

Open the m_Massing_Start. sweeps. 4 On the Design Bar. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Massing. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. and floors. under Views (all). on the Options Bar. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. floor.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. and cutting geometry. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . You assign the default wall. click Create Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. click the Training Files icon. under Floor Plans. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools.

and click OK. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and click OK. and then click . under Views (all). under Constraints. 9 In the Materials dialog box. under Constraints. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. 21 In the Materials dialog box. and then click . enter 1550 mm for the Offset.7 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. and click OK. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. click the Value for Material. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. click . under Materials and Finishes. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the View toolbar. 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click the Value for Material. on the Options Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. 19 On the Design Bar. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser. and click 16 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools | 737 . click Extrusion Properties.

24 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Lines. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 28 In the drawing area. select Pick a plane. under Views (all). 26 On the Design Bar. TIP If necessary. double-click West. and click OK. 29 Click to select the face. under Views (all). The second form is on top of the first form. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Elevations (Building Elevation). highlight the larger form. double-click {3D} to see the results. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. and click on the Options Bar.

35 On the Options Bar.32 On the Options Bar. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click . 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. and click to select the line start point. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click . 37 On the Design Bar. click . click the arrow next to the drawing options. Next. and delete the vertical construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. TIP If you do not see this option. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 39 On the Edit toolbar. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Using Massing Tools | 739 . click Modify. 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.

double-click East. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 46 On the Options Bar. click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Lines and. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . 48 On the Design Bar. . click . click 47 Create an arc as shown. click Blend Properties. under Views (all). and click OK. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 43 In the Project Browser. 50 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit Top. click Finish Sketch. .40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 51 On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar.

5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. double-click Level 1. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. click Ref Plane. as shown. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.52 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. In this exercise. 7 Using the same technique. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. under Views (all). 2 In the drawing area. Using Massing Tools | 741 . you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.rvt. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options bar. click and enter 15000 for Offset. In the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. select the mass. m_Massing_Start.

click Finish Mass. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.rvt. click . 12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. When sketching each extrusion. click and select Chain. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . snap the corners to the intersections. click Lines and. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. on the Options Bar. click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. and then click Hidden Line. 19 On the File menu. 15 Click OK. on the View Control Bar.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. In this exercise. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Extrusion Properties. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. click Save As. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 14 Under Constraints. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap.

click New. click the Training Files icon.rfa. 18000 mm for Height. and 18000 mm for Depth. and click OK. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. Open Box.rfa. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. click Family Types. 3 In the Name dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 . click Open. and 6000 mm for Depth. 12000 mm for Height. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. under Other. 9 Click OK. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 10 On the File menu. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. you create new family types from a mass family file. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. 11000 mm for Height. In this exercise. and click OK. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. and click Apply. and click Apply. and 9000 mm for Depth. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. and click OK. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 15000 mm for Width. click Save As. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. Finally. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. and click Apply.

8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. 4 On the File menu. click Open. under Views (all). click Place Mass. 1 If not already selected. 3 On the View Control Bar. Semi Barrel Vault. click the Training Files icon. and Triangle. under Floor Plans. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder.rfa family files. Open the m_Massing_In-place. double-click Site. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa. 9 In the Type Selector. You also load other existing mass families and place them. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . Arc Dome. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. click the Training Files icon. 7 Open the Box-Training.rfa. 2 In the Project Browser. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

select Rotate after placement. 15 In the Type Selector. 21 In the Type Selector. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 24 On the Options Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . enter 90 for Angle. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. click Place Mass. select the 3 boxes. and click OK twice. 12 Select the box. click Modify. 26 In the drawing area. and click . and click OK twice. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. and click . 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 22 On the Options Bar. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 18 Press CTRL. click Modify.11 On the Design Bar. and click to place the mass. select the triangle. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 25 On the Design Bar.

and click .27 Select the triangle. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. 35 On the View menu. click . 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. you join these mass elements. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click OK twice. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 30 In the Type Selector. 34 On the View toolbar. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. In the next exercise. 32 Select the box and click . In this exercise.

Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. NOTE When you join geometry. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise.rvt file. . the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. click . 4 Select the triangle. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 . and then press ESC to see the result.

Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. on the Edit toolbar. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. and snap to the midpoint of the edge.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. click for Axis. double-click Site. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. enter SM. under Floor Plans. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing . 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. click 8 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.

click 14 On the Tools toolbar. you joined mass elements together. 17 Press ESC to see the result. . The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. In this exercise. and then select the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click . 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first.

TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. select Rotate after placement. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. and then click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. select Sloped (primary). 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. clear Curved. and select the triangle mass element. click . You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Modify. enter 90 degrees for Angle. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 1 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. 2 On the Window menu. click Place Mass. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 7 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. under Views (all).rvt. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.

and click Wireframe. 16 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. double-click North. click Modify. 24 On the View Control Bar. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click . 20 On the Design Bar. and click .13 On the Design Bar. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. and click . 14 In the drawing area. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. click Place Mass. and click Wireframe. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 21 In the drawing area. click . select the 2 semi barrel vaults. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . under Views (all). TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. select the three arc domes. and click OK twice.

33 On the Design Options toolbar. clear Sloped. 30 On the View menu. and click OK. you placed mass elements into Design Options. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces.rvt. select Curved. In this exercise. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click Visibility/Graphics. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. you can make it the primary option. click . 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. select Curved and. click . and click OK. under Option. 29 In the Project Browser. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . click the Design Options tab. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Make Primary. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 32 Click the value for Design Option. under Views (all). 36 On the File menu. double-click {3D}.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults.

Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. click Wall by Face. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. 2 On the View toolbar. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 1 In the Project Browser. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. click the Training Files icon. 5 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Orient ➤ Southeast. under Views (all). 3 On the View menu. you pick massing faces to create walls.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 6 On the Options Bar.Brick on CMU. click to show the massing model.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 754 | Chapter 22 Massing . double-click Level 1. double-click Level 5. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Views (all). alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. double-click Level 3. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 14 In the Project Browser.8 In the Project Browser. Click Wall by Face. 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . If desired. under Floor Plans. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click Wall by Face. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. and click Wireframe. double-click Level 9. 21 On the Design Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you pick massing faces to create floors.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. In this exercise. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. click . 22 Select all the faces shown in red. under Views (all). Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 20 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.

4 Click OK. under Views (all). clear Curtain Panels. 2 On the View menu. click Floor Area Faces. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. select all levels. and click OK.rvt. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing .Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and Walls. Curtain Systems. 1 In the Project Browser.

9 Press CTRL.8 On the View menu. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 . click Orient ➤ Northeast. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. select Levels 1-4. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. clear Exclude Options. click Floor Area Faces. 10 On the Options Bar.

under Floor Plans. verify that Select Multiple is selected. under Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the Options Bar.13 Press CTRL. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. under Views (all). select Level 1. click . double-click Mass Schedule. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Floor by Face. click Create Floors. 20 On the Options Bar. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. double-click Level 1. 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 18 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 21 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click Floor Area Faces.

you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors.In this exercise. click Roof by Face. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. double-click {3D}. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. under Views (all).rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.

click Create Roof. and then click OK. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. select Basic Roof : Generic . click Visibility/Graphics. and Walls. Your model should now look as shown. 11 On the View menu.400mm. Curtain Systems. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . select Curtain Panels. click Create Roof. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 9 On the Options Bar.4 In the Type Selector.

Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 In the Project Browser. click Curtain System by Face. 4 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.rvt. 5 Press CTRL. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 3 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. double-click {3D}. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces.In this exercise.

7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Create System.6 On the Options Bar.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . select the blended form on the in-place mass. 9 On the Options Bar. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. click Create System. In this exercise.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

clear Curtain Panels. Next. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Floor Plans.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click OK. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 1 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all).rvt. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. double-click Site. and then click OK. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. Floors. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . Roofs. and click OK. enter 30000 for Width. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and Walls. Curtain Systems. 2 On the View menu.

10 On the Design Bar. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. clear Exclude Options. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. click Modify. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 .

TIP To select the curtain wall. under Views (all). remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. 15 In the Project Browser. click Remake.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Floor Plans. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . click . In the next steps. double-click Level 1. 19 On the View toolbar. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. Also. click OK.

20 Select the roof as shown. click Remake. you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors. 21 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 .TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls.

you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. and click Remake. you changed the size of an existing mass family. In this exercise. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . The 3D view now shows only the building shell.rvt. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. 1 Open the 3D view.22 Select the arc dome curtain system.

7 Clear one of the check boxes. 9 Select Mass. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. right-click on the 3D view.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. to the building shell. 3 In the Project Browser. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. If desired. This concludes the massing tutorial. such as columns and an extruded roof. and click OK. click All to select all categories. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . 4 Rename the view 3D . 8 Click None to clear the selection. and click Duplicate. 5 On the View menu.Massing only. click Visibility/Graphics. In this exercise. You might create the model shown. 6 On the Model Categories tab.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

Site 23 In this tutorial. 771 . you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project.

you add a building pad to the site. and double-click Site. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . and then modify the data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. In the final exercises. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the second part of this exercise. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. and walkways. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. expand Floor Plans. Open the m_First_Project.Using Site Tools In this lesson. Using the first method. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. This project file was created using the default metric template. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you create a toposurface using two different methods. click Point. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. convert the data to a table. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. 4 On the Options Bar. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. You add property lines manually. click the Training Files icon. and click Site. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Open. islands. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. click Toposurface. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point.

A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. Use the following illustration as a reference.6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. Using Site Tools | 773 . Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. 8 On the Options Bar. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.

click Finish Surface. 15000 mm.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. under Additional Contours. click Site Settings. enter 1500 mm. under Increment. 15 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. and click Shading with Edges. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. and click OK. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 14 On the View toolbar. 12000 mm. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. Use the following illustration as a reference. click . click Model Graphics Style.

23 Click the Level 1 text. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. select Preserve colors. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. 28 On the Design Bar. click the elevation value. 19 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. SAT. DXF. Until it is exploded. click Modify. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. under Views (all). Click Open. Before importing the contour data. Using Site Tools | 775 . Under Layer/Level Colors. it is considered an import symbol. 25 On the File menu. 21 Click the Level 2 text. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. click to delete it. and double-click South. click the Training Files icon. enter 1000 mm.16 On the View toolbar. 24 In the Project Browser. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. and press ENTER. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. click Yes. and press ENTER. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. DGN. and click OK. 29 Select the imported topography. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. double-click Site. modify the level names and elevations. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Under Import or Link. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. under Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. on the Standard toolbar. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. under Floor Plans. rename the level Basement.

36 On the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. select it. click Pin Position. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Modify. when the edges highlight. 34 Under Visibility. and then click OK. 32 On the View menu. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Visibility/Graphics. clear Elevations. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotations Categories tab. and click OK. clear C_INDX. click Toposurface. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 31 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. When you select the import symbol. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours.30 On the Edit menu.

Using the second method. Using Site Tools | 777 . 42 On the View toolbar. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. this project file is required in its current state. click Finish Surface. click Save As.rvt. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. click . 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you add property lines using two methods. name the project Site-in progress. Using the first method. 43 On the File menu. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Property Lines. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. and click Save.39 On the Design Bar. 40 On the View toolbar. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor.

Site-in progress. click Finish Sketch. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Click Modify. select Create property lines by sketching. click Lines. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Property Line. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Select and delete the right vertical line. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . Using the 3-point Arc tool. add an arc line on the right. If you have not completed the previous exercise. On the Design Bar. and click OK. do so before continuing.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 4 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.rvt. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Lines. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.

on the Standard toolbar. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. and click OK.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 9 In the warning dialog box. 8 On the Options Bar. select Edit Table. click 12 On the Design Bar. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. click OK. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. when they highlight. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. click Property Line. 15 Starting in Row #1. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. select the lines. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box. click OK. A warning dialog box is displayed. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. to delete them.

24 On the View menu. click to place it. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click the Imported Categories tab. The tags display more prominently in this view. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . 19 In the Tags dialog box. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. right-click in the Design Bar. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. click to place the property lines. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. and click Drafting. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 28 On the Options Bar. 16 Click OK. and open the folder. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. and click Shading with Edges. 23 In the Tags dialog box.dwg and click OK. and click OK. click Training Files. click Tag.Notice that after you complete the last line. 20 Click Load. click Model Graphics Style. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. If the gap is not closed. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines.rfa and click Open. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. Before adding property line segment tags. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. clear Leader. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 26 Under Visibility. 31 On the View Control Bar. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you created two sets of property lines. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. enter the name Working Contour. Using Site Tools | 781 . In the next exercise. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. click Model Graphics Style. you loaded and tagged the property line segments.rvt. click Object Styles. click New. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.32 On the File menu. click Save. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. Site-in progress. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. In the final step. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. this project file is required in its current state. and click Wireframe. 2 On the Settings menu. In this exercise. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography.

Working Contour. Under Line Pattern. enter 1000. 11 Click OK. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. 10 Under Additional Contours. click Site Settings. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. select Dash dot. The next exercise requires a new dataset. Under Range Type. Under Line Color. In this exercise. click Close. select Single Value. 12 On the File menu. select Working Contour. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. under Contour Line Display. The object style subcategory. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. select a shade of Brown.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 7 Click OK. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. Creating Topographic Subregions. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. 782 | Chapter 23 Site .0 mm. Under Subcategory.

click Open. you create subregions in order to define roads. Open the m_Site. 2 On the Design Bar. parking areas. try to replicate the location and proportion. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Using Site Tools | 783 . Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. and islands. and islands. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. such as material. click Subregion.rvt file located in the Metric folder. NOTE In the Metric dataset.In the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Although the exact dimensions are not important. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. you create topographic subregions to define roads. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. click Lines. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. parking areas. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.

Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . click Properties. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. 784 | Chapter 23 Site .Tarmacadam. enter Parking for Name. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box.Tarmacadam for Name. and click OK. under Materials and Finishes.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step. click Finish Sketch. select Site . and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. 8 On the Design Bar. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog box. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. and double-click Topography Schedule. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Identity Data. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click Shading with Edges. click the Value for Material. 9 On the View menu. expand Schedules/Quantities.

and click Hidden Line. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. Delete overlapping lines. As you create new subregions. 18 In the Project Browser. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Within each subregion. 20 On the Design Bar. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Model Graphics Style. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 22 In the upper-right parking area. 21 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 14 On the Options Bar. click Edit Boundary. under Floor Plans. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. and click Shading with Edges. they display within this schedule. click Lines. Using Site Tools | 785 . click Finish Sketch. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Notice that the project area has increased. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. In this training project. click Subregion.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. under Floor Plans. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. 17 On the View Control Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 16 On the Design Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch.

and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. click Properties.Grass for Name. and click OK. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Name each region Island . 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. enter Island .Grass for Name. 25 In the Materials dialog box. 29 In the Project Browser. select Site . click Finish Sketch.23 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. click the Value for Material.Grass.Grass. and apply the material Site . double-click Site. 28 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. under Identity Data. double-click Topography Schedule. 786 | Chapter 23 Site . 27 On the Design Bar. You must sketch each region separately.

34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.walkway. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Concrete . 35 On the Design Bar.30 In the Project Browser.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . click Finish Sketch. 33 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. double-click Site. Using Site Tools | 787 . under Schedules/Quantities. 32 On the Design Bar. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. click Lines. Name the subregion Walkway.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. under Schedules/Quantities. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. there is still only one toposurface. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Site tutorial-in progress. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. When you use the grading tool. 37 On the File menu.rvt.rvt. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Save As. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. and click Save. Grading the Toposurface. 36 In the Project Browser.

select Copy Internal Points. click . Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. click Modify. select Existing for Phase Created. Using Phasing.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 5 On the Design Bar. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. under Phasing. and click Select and Edit. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. A warning dialog box is displayed. see the tutorial. and click OK. double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Using Site Tools | 789 . Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. under Floor Plans.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 790 | Chapter 23 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. demolished. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. and new.

click Point. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration.11 On the View Control Bar. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. 15 On the Options Bar. Using Site Tools | 791 . Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Press DELETE. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway.

click . The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. and click Shading with Edges. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 20 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style. click Finish Surface.17 On the Design Bar. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click . 792 | Chapter 23 Site . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click View Properties. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View toolbar.

you can delete it.rvt. 23 Select the toposurface. 24 On the View menu. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify Existing for Phase. 26 On the File menu. click View Properties. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. only the original toposurface displays. under Floor Plans. If you have an existing building model. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pad. click Save. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. this project file is required in its current state. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. and click OK. and delete it. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Phasing. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. specify New Construction for Phase. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 On the Design Bar. under Phasing. Using Site Tools | 793 . double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. and click OK. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE By default. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Therefore. click Lines. Adding a Building Pad. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Only the graded topography displays. the Pick Walls command is active. When you add a building pad. you create a building pad. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element.

click Finish Sketch.5 On the Design Bar. click 8 On the View toolbar. Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . 7 On the View toolbar. 6 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style. . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. . click pad.

5 On the Design Bar. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Site Components In this exercise. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 3 In the Type Selector. Using Site Tools | 795 . 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Modify. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Save. and select the parking space. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area.rvt. double-click Site. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Parking Component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.9 On the File menu. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.90 deg. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. under Floor Plans. this project file is required in its current state. Site tutorial-in progress. Adding Site Components.

12 In the Type Selector. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. choose any tree type. . under Floor Plans. click 9 On the View toolbar.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. double-click Site. 8 On the View toolbar. 796 | Chapter 23 Site . . click spaces. click Site Component. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

click . Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 14 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Using Site Tools | 797 . 15 On the View toolbar. click .

In the following illustration. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Hidden Line. click Tag All Not Tagged.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Apply. 5 On the View menu. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. this project file is required in its current state. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Site tutorial-in progress. click Save. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. and click OK. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. click Apply.rvt. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. double-click Site. In the following exercise. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 16 On the File menu. Tagging Site and Parking Components. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed.

You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. you create a parking schedule. If necessary. The parking schedule is displayed. select Mark. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. click the Fields tab. Site tutorial-in progress. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules. enter Size. 4 Under Available fields. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. 7 Under Fields. this project file is required in its current state. and under Heading. click Schedule/Quantities. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Type. 7 On the File menu. enter Space. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Save. and under Heading. and click OK. Using Site Tools | 799 . select Mark. and click Add. 8 Under Fields. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Type. and click Add. 5 Under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click OK.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. select Parking for Category.

zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 10 In the Project Browser. click Tile. under Views (all). click Close Hidden Windows. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. 800 | Chapter 23 Site . This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 15 On the File menu. 12 In the Site plan. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 11 On the Window menu. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. click Save. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. double-click Site. under Floor Plans.9 On the Window menu. number the first three spaces consecutively. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. under Space.

when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. and modify repetitive units. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. In this tutorial. all instances in the building model are updated. and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you also simplify the modification process. You can also nest groups within other groups. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. you not only simplify their placement. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. For example. By grouping objects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. or with those working on a different project. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. 801 . place.

click . 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. 5 On the Edit toolbar. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. click Save As. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. classrooms. Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 9 On the File menu. 7 Right-click Group 1. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms.rvt file located in the Metric folder. desk. click Open. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. and click Save. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ENTER. Open the m_Grouping. and two nightstands. name the file Grouping-in progress. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. After you create a model group. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2.rvt.Creating Groups In this lesson. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 8 Enter Typical guest room. expand Groups. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and click Rename. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. chair. Creating a Group In this exercise. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and expand Model. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. and typical office layouts. Placing a Group. and select the bed. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. 6 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon.

rvt. Grouping-in progress. click Finish.Placing a Group In this exercise. click . 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Edit toolbar. Creating Groups | 803 . using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. select the original instance of the group. as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. select the group. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan.

you make changes to a single instance of a group. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 1 In the drawing area. Grouping-in progress. When you finish the editing routine. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. as shown. Modifying a Group In this exercise. Modifying a Group. click Edit Group. 9 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group.rvt. click Save.

you create a group that you add to a previously created group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. click . and select the desk and chair. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 7 On the Design Bar. the host group is also updated. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. Creating Nested Groups. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. When you make changes to a nested group. 3 Press and hold CTRL.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . 8 On the File menu. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. click Finish Group. click Save.

all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. which acts as the host. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click . expand Model. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group. and press ENTER.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. The new group is then nested within the original group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson.rvt. 2 On the Edit toolbar. In the selection. Grouping-in progress. and click Rename. right-click Group 1. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group.

select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. When you edit the group to add the component. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. verify that Multiple is clear. click Edit Group. 10 In the drawing area. 12 On the File menu. 8 On the Design Bar.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. click Finish Group. and all instances are updated to include the nested group. Grouping-in progress. Because the modified group is nested. click Add To Group. Modifying a Nested Group. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . 2 In the Type Selector. click Save. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise.rvt. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. everything else is available for selection. 11 On the Design Bar. select the Typical toilet room group. click Component. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. 3 In the drawing area. 9 On the Options Bar. The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance.

click Finish Group. click Add To Group. 7 Press TAB. click Edit Group. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . select the sink. 10 In the drawing area. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. and select the nested toilet room group.

and press ENTER. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. you add door tags to a group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. and click Rename. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. Grouping-in progress. under Groups. and click Duplicate. Lastly. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. You then place the new group in the building model. right-click Typical guest room. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. When you load the group from the library into a new project. After you finish the modified group. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. and then save the tags as an attached detail group.rvt. In subsequent exercises. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. having created a group that represents a typical layout. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. 3 Enter Corner guest room. Working with Groups | 809 .All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Working with Groups In this lesson. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. Working with Groups. click Save. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. 12 On the File menu.

16 Select the same toilet room group. 6 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. click Remove From Group. select Corner toilet room. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. and drag it into the corner guest room. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 14 Select the toilet room. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. and press DELETE. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. 11 On the Edit toolbar. click OK. 10 Press and hold CTRL. click . to specify the group origin. and select the desk and chair. 13 On the Design Bar. where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 After a warning message displays.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. click Finish. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. click Finish Group. select the Corner guest room group.

19 In the drawing area. 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish to finish placing the group. 22 In the drawing area. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. past the exterior wall. 23 On the Design Bar. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. click 26 On the Options Bar. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 On the Edit toolbar. select the Corner toilet room group. click Save. click Add To Group. for Axis. click . 29 On the File menu. 20 On the Options Bar. Working with Groups | 811 . Creating a Detail Group. 18 On the Options Bar. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. and click to specify the end point. click Edit Group. select the Corner guest room group.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. click Finish Group. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. select the Corner guest room group.

and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. 10 Enter Tile. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. and click Modify on the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click to add an arc leader. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.rvt. click Filled Region. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Grouping-in progress. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. click Text. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.

3 On the Options Bar.rvt. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. Working with Groups | 813 . Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. clear Leader. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. expand Groups. double-click Level 3. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. as shown. 14 Right-click Group 1. and select the note and the filled region. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. Using Attached Detail Groups. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. click Tag. 12 On the Edit toolbar. and press ENTER. Grouping-in progress. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. as shown. 13 In the Project Browser. and expand Detail. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. click . Because the detail group contains variables. 20 On the File menu. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and select the nested Typical toilet room group. click Place Detail. click . 10 Enter Door tags. 8 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. and click OK. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. expand Groups. and expand Typical toilet room. Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. expand Attached Detail. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Door tags. and click Rename. press TAB. and press ENTER. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 7 On the Edit toolbar. press and hold CTRL. A warning dialog box is displayed. and select the two door tags. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). 9 Right-click Group 1.

6 On the File menu. and click Open. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. click Wall. Grouping-in progress. select Typical toilet room. click New ➤ Project. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 3 Click Save. click the Training Files icon. click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 13 Select Typical toilet room. therefore. 10 On the Options Bar. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. click Browse. as shown. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click to specify the start point of the square. navigate to the directory where you saved the group. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. drag it into the drawing area. 11 In the drawing area. click OK.rte file located in the Metric folder. Saving and Loading Groups. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group.rvt. and expand Model. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to draw a square. Working with Groups | 815 . This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. under Template file. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. click Save. 14 On the File menu. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Save Group dialog box. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. expand Groups. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. 5 In the New Project dialog box. and click Open. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project.rvg. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise.

Automatically Creating a Group. 2 On the Edit toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. and click Save. select the instance of Typical toilet room. click Save. you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. click Finish. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. click .IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. Loaded_Group. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. 1 In the drawing area. 15 On the File menu. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection.

click Close. 6 On the Design Bar. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. and click OK.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. click Create new group types. click Fix Groups. a warning dialog box is displayed. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. click Modify. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. 7 On the File menu. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. 4 In the warning dialog box. Working with Groups | 817 .

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton. and beams to Level 1.Structural 25 In this tutorial. You begin by adding the structural walls. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. In the final lesson. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. columns. 819 . After completing level 1.

The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. click the Training Files icon. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Open. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. Open the m_Structural. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

and select m_wall-import. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. 2 On the File menu. under Import or Link. go to the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). click Save As. SAT. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. and select Origin to origin.dwg from the Metric folder. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 7 Click Open.rvt. DGN. Adding Structural Walls | 821 . 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. select Automatically place. Select All for Layers. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. This file is used in the next exercise. and double-click Level 2. Select Current view only. you imported a DWG file.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. select Invert colors. After you trace the walls. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. expand Floor Plans. If necessary. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. 6 Under Positioning. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. Sketching Structural Walls. 8 On the File menu. to trace the initial set of structural walls. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. DXF. expand Views (all). In this exercise. click the Training Files icon.

Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. select Basic Wall: Generic . 5 In the Type Selector. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and click Structural.200mm. In addition. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. rather than the height. proceed to Step 2. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. Right-click the Design Bar. First. click Structural Wall. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural .

and click to specify the next wall endpoint. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. and click the next line intersection.6 On the Options Bar. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. and click to specify the wall endpoint. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 10 Move the cursor to the right. In the steps that follow. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. Click . ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. Specify Level 1.

you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. and click to complete the chain of walls. 824 | Chapter 25 Structural . 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. click Modify to finish the sketch. TIP If necessary. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View toolbar. click . expand Floor Plans. in the View toolbar. and double-click Level 2.

On the Options Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. click Structural Wall. click . you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the wall chain. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

Click to create a three-point arc. click . 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 23 Under Visibility.dwg. and click OK. select Basic Wall: Generic . 25 In the Type Selector.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. clear m_wall-import. click the Imported Categories tab. This is the left extent of the arc. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. 21 On the View menu. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 2. 26 On the Options Bar. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . 28 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. click Structural Wall.200mm. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. This is the right extent of the arc.

Adding Structural Walls | 827 . 32 On the Design Bar. enter 1500. click the value. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm.29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. click Modify. and press ENTER. If it is not.

click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. you create the final structural walls for the project. Both walls are 1200 mm long. In the steps that follow. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. clear Chain.34 Select the lower horizontal wall. 35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. enter 1500. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. and press ENTER. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural .

click Modify. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. 41 On the View toolbar. 40 On the Design Bar. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. Adding Structural Walls | 829 .38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. click .

Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. Structural_tutorial. You then make minor modifications to their position. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls.42 On the File menu. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In the next exercise. This project file is required. In this exercise. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. click Save. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural . in its current state. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click Level 2. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant.

and when it highlights. select Intersecting Walls.4 On the Options Bar. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. click Options to specify the wall pick options. After you select Entire Walls. click Modify. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. and click OK. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. select it. the Options button becomes available. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. 6 Move the cursor to the left. Select Entire Walls for Pick. and click to place the dimension as shown. On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select .

Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural . 11 Click the temporary dimension value.9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. joists. click Undo Edit dimension length. click Save. 13 On the File menu. 12 On the Edit menu.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. you add structural columns. in its current state. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. In the next lesson. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. several different beam types. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . In this exercise. This project file is required. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure.

select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. and Level 2. double-click Level 1. you use the grid intersection tool. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in to place the column. click Structural Column. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. In addition. 2 On the View menu. If necessary. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. TIP When adding the column. select Height. Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. and you place a column outside of the grids. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

C3. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. and select grids 1-5. TIP To create the crossing selection. 9 Use a crossing selection. click Grid Intersection.7 Add similar columns to C2. and C5. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. and A. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar.

13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. 15 On the Options Bar. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. click Finish. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . Columns A3-5 are shown below. This completes this set of columns. 14 If necessary.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. zoom out until you can see all the grids.

23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. click Modify. you could not have rotated them independently of each other.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 20 On the Design Bar. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . 21 Select column A5 and delete it. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. B3-5 are shown below. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. click Grid Intersection. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Structural Column. 24 On the Design Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. click Finish.

you used various methods to add structural columns. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. 2 On the View menu. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . This project file is required. Structural_tutorial. you add beams manually. In this exercise. double-click Level 2. in its current state. click Save. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you add structural beams to the building model. As you use the beam tool.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. expand Views (all).25 On the View toolbar. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. 4 In the Type Selector. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Adding Structural Beams and Girders. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. click . Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Beam. 26 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans.

select Girder for Usage. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. 10 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Beam. and then move the cursor up to grid A. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32.7 On the Design Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 .7. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. 11 On the Options Bar.

Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. click Grid. Use the following table for other conditions. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. 14 On the Options Bar.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. For example. When you use the grid tool to place beams. 840 | Chapter 25 Structural . if a beam is joined column-to-column.

21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . 22 In the Type Selector.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. and select grid C. 17 On the Options Bar. 24 Select grid 3. click Grid. click Modify. click the temporary dimension value. click Beam. 18 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. click Finish. and press ENTER. enter 8200.

Notice beams are added between columns. select Chain. and for Usage. Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural . 25 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. In addition. click Finish. select Girder for Usage. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. Click column B5 to add the first beam. 27 Using point-to-point insertion.

click Grid. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. click Finish. SI. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 33 Select grid A. select Girder for Usage. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. to snap only to intersections. Press ESC to end the chain. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. 34 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain. You can also use the shortcut key. connecting the column at B4. 30 On the Options Bar. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this.

7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.7 beam had crossed grid A. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . 36 On the Options Bar.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. click . click Finish. click Grid. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 39 On the View toolbar. 37 Select grid B. 38 On the Options Bar. If the W310x32.

43 In the Type Selector. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). 44 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. 48 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Beam.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. double-click Level 2. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. 46 Move the cursor to the right. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . In the steps that follow. 47 On the Design Bar. click . 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3. double-click Level 2. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . In the steps that follow.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. select Girder. for Usage. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 52 In the Type Selector. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Beam. and click when it intersects grid 2. and select Chain. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. 53 On the Options Bar.

56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. and click when it intersects grid 1. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. 57 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 . click .

You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. click Save. Structural_tutorial. Structural Framing. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. Adding Joists and Purlins. you add joists.B3 quadrants. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. and purlins to the building model. 2 Zoom around the A1 . For example. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. under Families.58 On the File menu. 4 In the Project Browser. M_W-Wide Flange.7. You then create a joist array. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. In the next exercise. double-click Level 2. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. in its current state. click W310x32. click Beam. This project file is required. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural .

8 With the beam selected.6 On the Design Bar. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. click Modify. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 10 Click OK. In addition. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 . The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. click on the Options Bar. click Array. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move to. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER.12 On the Options Bar. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . Once the direction is set. Enter 14 for Number. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 . 17 Add a W310x32.7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin.

Enter 7 for Number. click Array. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. This is the array start point. Clear Group and Associate. style. Select 2nd for Move to. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . and purlins. 20 On the Edit menu.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. and color within the Object Styles dialog box. joists. and click. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 21 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight.

click . and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 . Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. click . clear all options except Structural Framing.The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 26 In the Filter dialog box. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view.

You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . click . This project file is required. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. In the next lesson. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. in its current state. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. you create new levels. In this exercise. 29 On the Design Bar. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. click Modify. 31 On the File menu. and notice the connection symbols display. click Save. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 30 On the View toolbar.28 In the Element Properties dialog box.

5 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Click to add Level 3. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. click Level. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. You need at least 3 meters of space. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations. under Views (all).Defining New Levels In this exercise. 2 Select grid 1. select Make Plan View. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. and double-click Building Elevation. you create several new levels. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2.

Each level is 3000 mm high. Duplicating the Existing Design. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. These levels that are required in the next exercise. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. Structural_tutorial. 8 On the File menu. in its current state. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. In this exercise.In the Project Browser. click Save. you created three new levels. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. click . This project file is required. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

click Modify.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. select Level 2. 8 On the Design Bar. Make sure the entire building model is included. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . click Copy to Clipboard. click Modify. click OK. and select Levels 3 and 4. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. 3 On the Edit menu. 5 On the Edit menu. press and hold CTRL. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box.

Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. In the next lesson. click Save. in its current state. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. you create a framing elevation.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. This project file is required. double-click Building Elevation. In this exercise. 10 On the File menu. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural . You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. You can now view the new elevation. Elevation 1-a. click Framing Elevation. and click. click Modify. 4 Place the cursor over grid C.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 .Dataset This exercise requires the project file. in the Project Browser. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. double-click Level 2.

In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. You are ready to add the structural braces. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . This project file is required. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. in its current state. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. In the next exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you add structural braces to the building model. click Save. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse.Notice the stick framing representation. Adding Structural Braces. 7 On the File menu. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces.

you use point-to-point insertion. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. When adding the braces. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. and using the shape grips. select the view crop box. NOTE If necessary. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.4. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 . 3 In the Type Selector. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. click Brace.

Enter 4 for Number. Select Constrain. Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. Select 2nd for Move to. click Array. 11 On the Options Bar. Clear Group and Associate. The second brace is displayed. click Modify. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint.The brace displays. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . 10 On the Edit menu. 9 Select both braces on Level 4.

14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. click Tag All Not Tagged. select Structural Framing Tags. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 . and click OK. click . 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.

In this exercise. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. click Save.17 On the File menu. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural .

however. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. such as walls. Using Worksharing. All other team members can view this workset. and so on. In this tutorial. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. doors. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. You can enable Worksharing for any project. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. 865 . This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. called Worksharing.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. they cannot make changes to it. A workset is a collection of building elements. floors. stairs. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.

Elements specific to a view. When you are working on a shared project. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. and click Editable. In the next exercise. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. After the project is shared. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. such as a tenant interior. you can select which worksets are open or closed. In a multi-story structure. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. In the lessons and exercises that follow. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. After learning the fundamentals. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. such as annotations and dimensions. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you must first enable Worksharing. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Instead. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. you specify an active workset. When setting up Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. select the desired workset. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. use Element Borrowing. To make a workset editable. go to the Worksets dialog box. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects .

remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. if a workset named Interior was created. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. and View worksets. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. designers work in teams. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. not including the Project Standards. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. On this tab. Shared Levels and Grids. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Therefore. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. In most projects. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . For example. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. with each assigned a specific functional task. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. for a typical project. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. When creating the new worksets. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. ■ Team member roles Typically. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Generally. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Regardless of the default setting. When you create a new workset. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. the file is saved as the central file. Experience has shown that. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. each team member has control over a portion of the design. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. You should have at least one workset for each person. As new members create worksets for their own use.

you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. On the Options Bar. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. When finished or at regular intervals. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. you make that workset editable by you. you can select which workset is active. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. however. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. and then save the local file. save to the central file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. When you save locally (to your local file). you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. However. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. After saving to the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. your changes are saved. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. In this instance. When working remotely. When you save to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. This makes them available to other team members. In this situation. This is called “Selective Open. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . proceeds as usual. When you save to the central file. within the local file. your changes propagate to the entire team. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. make any required worksets editable. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. As you work. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you should then save to your local file. if you know who checked out the required workset. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk.

click Open. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. click the Training Files icon. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. reload the latest changes from the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. In this conceptual exercise. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and make that workset editable. Alternatively. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. In the next exercise. using VPN. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the c_Worksets. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. click Worksets. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building.rvt file located in the Common folder. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. for instance. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. To do this.

9 Click OK. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. click New. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Your username displays as the present owner. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. another is assigned the interior layout. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. under Show. 6 Under Show. a small number of team members are working on the building model. and notice all are editable by you. clear Visible by default in all views. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. In this case. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. and Views.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. imagine four users including yourself. 10 Click New. Only User-Created worksets should display. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. currently named Workset1. For training purposes. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Project Standards. 13 Click Rename. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. select Workset1. and click OK. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. you can rename the default workset. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. In this simple training project. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. turn off Families. it is better to make them visible by default. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Therefore.

type the name Exterior Shell. including the interior doors. You do. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Identity Data. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . 17 In the drawing area. 24 Select all of the interior elements. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. stairs. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 20 Click OK. 15 In the Worksets dialog box. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. and click OK. under Identity Data. 21 Select one of the interior walls. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click . click . When you initially activate Worksharing. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. expand Floor Plans. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell.14 In the Rename dialog box. 22 On the Options Bar. In this training file. click OK. and double-click Level 1. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 18 On the Options Bar. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. however. expand Views (all). and walls. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner.

34 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 30 Click OK. 31 On the View menu. 36 On the Options Bar.25 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. select all of the interior elements of the building model. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click . under Views (all). The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. under Identity Data. click Save As. 33 Select Interior Layout. If any interior elements remain. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 27 On the View menu. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Worksets tab. double-click Level 2. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. under Identity Data. click Visibility/Graphics. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and click OK. 35 In the drawing area.

you enabled Worksharing on a project. 2 In the Open dialog box. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. Next. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Worksets. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. In this exercise. you create your local file. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 40 Click Save. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. 44 Click OK. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. click Close. You have created a local file which is for your use only. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Open. please do so before continuing. select Specify.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. under Open Worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. select all the User-Created worksets. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 5 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . click Save As. select the central file and. In addition. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. click Non Editable. click Worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 45 On the File menu. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 6 In the Save As dialog box. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. make sure you remember the location of this central file. and click OK. and click OK. make modifications to the building model. 39 In the Save As dialog box. click Options. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. check out worksets. Now that you have created the central file. and click Save. 3 Click Open. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive.

Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you can still edit this wall. select Interior Layout. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 20 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Worksets. If this is selected. click Modify. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. On the Options Bar. however. under Identity Data. 17 On the Options Bar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 21 Click OK. and click OK. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. If it was owned by another user. In this case. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. 11 Click OK. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Before working on the model. select Interior Layout for Name. notice the Editable Only option. 22 On the File menu. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. In the Worksets dialog box. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Because this element is not owned by another user. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click . select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. In this case. and select Yes for Editable. click . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 23 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Verify that it is cleared. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. 12 On the Window menu. 14 In the Project Browser. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 19 Under Constraints.

26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. select Basic Wall: Interior . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide.126mm Partition (2-hr). 25 Delete the door. 28 In the Type Selector. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Modify. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 . 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. click Door. 33 In the Type Selector. click Wall. The precise location is not important.

At the end of a work session. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. If you have not yet completed these exercises. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . each user must check out worksets. In this particular case. For training purposes. two users access the central file through a network connection. You modified the building model. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. you should relinquish all worksets. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. it is recommended. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. add two door openings into the rooms you created. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you created your local file. and save locally immediately afterward. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. click Save to Central. skip the following section. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. displays the workset as well as the element type. By default. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Throughout the process. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. Whenever you save. please do so before continuing. which matches the information in the Status Bar. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. leave this file open in its current state. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. save to central. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. In the following section of this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. When working in your local file. a tooltip. checked out worksets. and reload the latest changes. In this exercise. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. make elements editable. In addition. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you should perform regular saves. Borrowed Elements is selected. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files.

instructions are staggered. 16 Click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Open. In addition. 3 On the Settings menu. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 10 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. and reset the Username to your computer login name. You now have a local copy of the project. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. specifically sequenced. This is a system setting. 11 In the Save As dialog box. click Save As. one user has already created a local file.rvt. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. select all the User-Created worksets. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. User 2: Create a local file. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. 14 On the File menu. click Options. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. consider that person to be User 1. and click OK. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 4 Click the General Tab and. 7 In the Open dialog box. 8 Click Open. and click Save. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. click Options. select the central file and. For training purposes. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. under Username. click Worksets. under Open Worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. You are now the owner of that workset. and click OK. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . return to the Settings dialog box.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. enter User 2. select Specify. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. This file is for your use only.

and double-click Level 1. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . click Save to Central. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. select the lower exterior wall. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. and select Yes for Editable. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. If you only have one workset checked out. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. click Worksets. it becomes the active workset. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. modify the building model. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. expand Views (all). 28 Click OK. open it now. 23 In the Project Browser. 18 On the File menu. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. If it is not open. 22 Click OK.User 1: Check out worksets. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 26 On the File menu.

select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. When you save to central. Before adding any furniture. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. select Yes for Editable. click Save to Central.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 48 On the Design Bar. the Visible by default option was not selected. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. right-click Copy of Level 1. 42 On the Project Browser. click Reload Latest. and click OK. 49 On the View menu. 40 On the File menu. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. click Visibility/Graphics. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. and click OK. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. click Component. 32 On the File menu. 38 Click OK. and click inside any room. 34 Click OK. under Floor Plans. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. 45 On the Project Browser. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Duplicate. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. click Modify. However. Therefore. you should create a furniture plan view. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. Click Yes. and click OK. click Worksets. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 41 Select Furniture Layout. 36 On the File menu. 43 On the Project Browser. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 47 In the Type Selector. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. right-click Level 1. click the Worksets tab. choose any desk. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. under Floor Plans. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. click Save to Central. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model.

under Show.52 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. and published their changes back to the central file. and click Properties. 54 Click OK. 59 In the Rename dialog box. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. enter Exterior Wall . In the final exercise of this tutorial. and click OK. and save 68 On the File menu. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. modified the building model. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Each user checked out worksets. click Reload Latest. click Worksets. User 1: Reload latest. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 65 On the File menu. select Project Standards. 69 On the File menu. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. click Save to Central. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. leave this file open in its current state. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. 61 On the File menu. and click OK. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. select the following. leave this file open in its current state. click Save to Central. 60 Click OK twice.200mm. select Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . select Reload Latest. 64 Click OK. Checking out worksets. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. click Rename.

click Open. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and click OK. On the Settings menu.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. throughout this training. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click the Training Files icon. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. you need to set up your central and local files. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and click Save. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and still have your local files open.rvt file located in the Common folder. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. There are specific instructions for each user. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. select Make this the Central location after save. The central file should still be open. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . click Options. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. click Save As. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. This exercise requires two users and. 7 On the File menu. As each of you work. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 9 In the Save As dialog box. click Options. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. finished the previous workset exercises. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. 5 Click Save. click Options. Each user must have network access to the central file. click Save As. and click OK. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. Set the Username to User 2. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. and click OK. This is the local file for User 1. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and these problems are rectified. you save the dataset as a central file. In subsequent steps. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. 3 In the Save As dialog box. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

click Open. and click OK. under Floor Plans. select the second window from the top. select the Interior Layout workset. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. select Exterior Shell. This is a system setting. and then click OK. select them. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 30 On the Options Bar. if any User-Created worksets are not open. click Worksets. and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Worksets.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. and then click OK. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 15 Click Open. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. click Options. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. You are now the owner of that workset. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. You are now the owner of that workset. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. You have created a local file which is for your use only. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. double-click Level 1. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 28 Under Active Workset. 25 Under Active Workset. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select Specify. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. and click OK. Next. verify that Editable Only is cleared. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. select the central file and under Open Worksets. select Interior Layout. and click Open. and select Yes for Editable. and click Save. 14 In the Open dialog box. Afterwards. In addition. 17 On the File menu. 13 On the File menu. 31 On the left exterior wall. and select Yes for Editable. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. return to the Settings dialog box. click Save As. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 18 In the Save As dialog box.

39 Click OK.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and click Editing Requests. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 36 Click Grant. click Check Now. select the request submitted by User 2. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box. After you submit the request. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. click the File menu. 37 Click Close. At this point. A message informs you that your request has been granted. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and notice the window is in the new location. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 .

select the following. select Save to Central. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. and close 40 On the File menu. and the other user granted it. and click OK. In this multi-user exercise. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you requested permission to edit the element. click Close. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. In this case. to Local.User 1 and 2: Save to Central.

you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. 885 . it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. In this tutorial.Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. Using design options. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).

This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In the final exercise of this lesson. In the second exercise. In addition. click the Training Files icon. After you and the client agree on the final design. For example. With the second option. you can have multiple sets of design options. 2 In the Design Options dialog box. click New.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you design each of the structural options. under Option Set. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. you can edit it. In the first exercise in this lesson. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Open the m_Urban_House. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you set up multiple design option sets. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. In this particular case. each with multiple design options. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Open. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . After you create a design option. the only available command is to create a new option set. At any time in the design process. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. make your final design decision. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. The client has asked you to create various options.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. each is constructed for interchangeability. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). TIP To center the middle column. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. or add a dimension string between the columns. the roof and structure systems must work together. expand Floor Plans. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. In the following illustration. 9 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. and click Close. therefore. add three columns. and the third column centered between the two. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 7 In the Type Selector. In this case. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Edit Selected. select: ■ ■ ■ .TIP In this exercise. 5 On the View menu. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click Column. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 4 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Edit toolbar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. expand Views (all). 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . click 12 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click Modify. By selecting Multiple. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option.

click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. Because of the size of the columns. Notice the 12 columns that you added. 18 On the View toolbar. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. When you are finished.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. click . 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . A copy of the three selected columns is added. 17 Zoom out and. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. using the same technique. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. they are difficult to see in this view.

21 In the Type Selector. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. click Beam. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 19 In the Project Browser. you add the beams that span the columns. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. double-click TOP OF CORE. 23 On the Design Bar. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. Use the following illustration as a guide. Zoom in on the upper right column.Next. Adding a beam is a two-click process. click . The second click specifies the end of the beam. 25 On the Edit toolbar. select Round Bar : 50mm. under Floor Plans. In it. click Modify. The first click specifies the beam start point.

26 On the Options Bar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar. and click the center point. Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. zoom into the left column. click . and select the center of the column to add a copy. select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 28 Zoom out. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .

click Rename. under Option. not a new option set. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. and click OK. enter Beam for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . under Option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 36 In the Rename dialog box. enter Brackets for New.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. enter Structure for New. click Rename. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. click Rename. 40 In the Rename dialog box. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. under Option. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click New. 38 In the Rename dialog box. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option Set. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK.

There should now be two roofing design options. 45 Under Roofing. click New. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 48 Under Option. When finished. 46 Under Option.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. under Structure. name the option Sunscreen. name the option Louvers. 43 In the Rename dialog box. 51 Under Edit. select Option 1 (primary). 41 Under Option Set. and click OK. select Edit Selected. click Rename. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 52 Click Close. Under Now Editing. select Option 2. under Option Set. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 47 Under Roofing. select Beam. This allows you to more easily manage the project. and click OK. click Rename. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . you create the second design option. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. under Option. and click OK. click Rename. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. click New. enter Roofing for New. it will resemble the following illustration. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 58 On the Tools menu. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Refer to the following illustration. click Component.53 In the Project Browser. double-click ROOF TERRACE. under Floor Plans. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . select M_Roof Beam. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Using the Align tool requires two clicks.

64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. The second click represents the move end point. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 61 On the Design Bar. Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . The first click sets the move start point. click Modify. 62 Select the beam and. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. on the Edit toolbar.60 After aligning the beam.

68 In the Design Options dialog box. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.66 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. the other for beams. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 69 Click Close. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. which is visible by default. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click Fi